1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \default_output_format pdf2
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 1
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation skip
134 \quotes_style english
138 \paperpagestyle default
139 \tracking_changes true
140 \output_changes false
144 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
145 \author 274215730 "scott"
146 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
157 by the \SpecialChar LyX
162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
164 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
165 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
166 Documentation mailing list:
167 \begin_inset CommandInset href
169 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
180 \begin_inset Newline newline
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Note Note
191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
192 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
193 \begin_inset Newline newline
198 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
199 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
207 \begin_layout Standard
208 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
209 LatexCommand tableofcontents
216 \begin_layout Chapter
220 \begin_layout Section
221 What is \SpecialChar LyX
225 \begin_layout Standard
227 is a document preparation system.
228 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
229 scripts, publishable books, business
230 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
231 It is unlike most other
232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
239 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
241 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 pt type, left justified, 5
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
267 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
271 \begin_layout Standard
272 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
277 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
281 \begin_layout Standard
286 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
287 's philosophy: most importantly,
288 the format of all of the manuals.
289 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
290 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
296 manual describes that, too.
299 \begin_layout Section
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
306 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
308 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
309 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
313 \begin_layout Standard
314 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
315 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
316 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
318 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
319 only a vertical scrollbar.
320 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
321 The first case is large images.
322 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
323 image and use the option
334 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
337 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
338 this doesn't work for equations yet.
341 \begin_layout Standard
342 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
343 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
351 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
358 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_layout Standard
363 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
365 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
367 Just select the manual you want to read from the
374 \begin_layout Section
375 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
379 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
386 \begin_layout Standard
387 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
388 can be configured via the menu
390 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
394 \begin_inset Index idx
397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
404 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
406 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
407 packages are available.
408 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
410 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
412 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
417 \begin_inset space \space{}
420 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
421 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
423 To force \SpecialChar LyX
424 to re-inspect your system, you should use
426 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
430 \begin_inset Index idx
433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
434 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
440 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
441 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
444 \begin_layout Section
447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
449 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
456 \begin_layout Standard
457 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
458 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
459 installed, but you will not be
460 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
461 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
462 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
463 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
464 document can always be output as plain text
468 \begin_layout Standard
469 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
470 or DocBook classes or packages.
471 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
472 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
475 \begin_layout Standard
476 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
477 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
478 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
481 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
489 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
490 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
493 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
497 \begin_inset Index idx
500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
501 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
509 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 \begin_layout Chapter
521 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
525 \begin_layout Section
526 Basic File Operations
527 \begin_inset Index idx
530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
539 \begin_layout Standard
544 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
545 in addition to some more advanced operations:
548 \begin_layout Itemize
570 \begin_layout Itemize
586 arg "buffer-new-template"
592 \begin_layout Itemize
614 \begin_layout Itemize
624 \begin_layout Itemize
638 \begin_layout Itemize
660 \begin_layout Itemize
672 arg "buffer-write-as"
678 \begin_layout Itemize
692 \begin_layout Itemize
706 \begin_layout Standard
707 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
708 a few minor differences.
711 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
722 command lists the available templates.
723 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
724 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
725 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
733 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
740 \begin_layout Standard
741 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
773 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
774 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
775 is just that — a big, blank space.
783 \begin_layout Standard
804 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
809 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
812 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
830 will reload the document from disk.
831 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
832 and want to restore it to the last save.
841 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
842 them as your changes.
845 \begin_layout Section
846 Basic Editing Features
847 \begin_inset Index idx
850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
859 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
866 \begin_layout Standard
867 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
868 can perform cut and paste operations
869 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
870 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
871 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
872 editing features and how to access
874 We will start with cut and paste.
877 \begin_layout Standard
878 As you might expect, the
882 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
883 various other editing features.
884 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
888 \begin_layout Itemize
894 \begin_inset Index idx
897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
926 \begin_layout Itemize
932 \begin_inset Index idx
935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
964 \begin_layout Itemize
970 \begin_inset Index idx
973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
998 \begin_layout Itemize
1002 \begin_inset space ~
1008 \begin_layout Itemize
1012 \begin_inset space ~
1018 \begin_layout Itemize
1022 \begin_inset space ~
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_inset Index idx
1035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1044 \begin_inset Index idx
1047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1062 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1072 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1078 \begin_layout Standard
1079 The first three are self-explanatory.
1080 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1081 and other programs by
1102 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1103 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1108 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1109 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1110 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1111 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1112 into individual cells.
1116 \begin_inset space ~
1121 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1122 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1126 \begin_layout Standard
1130 \begin_inset space ~
1135 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1137 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1139 \begin_inset space ~
1146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1152 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1153 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1154 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1160 \begin_inset space \space{}
1163 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1164 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1170 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1180 \begin_inset space ~
1189 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1190 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1192 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1201 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1202 start a new paragraph.
1203 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1204 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1212 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1218 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_inset space ~
1229 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1232 paste from the primary selection.
1233 This is normally the currently selected text.
1236 \begin_layout Standard
1239 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1241 \begin_inset space ~
1245 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset space ~
1263 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1269 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1272 \begin_inset space ~
1281 \begin_inset space ~
1286 button to skip the current word.
1290 \begin_inset space ~
1295 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1299 \begin_inset space ~
1304 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1306 If the toggle is set, searching for
1307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1318 will not match the word
1319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1333 Match whole words only
1335 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1336 to only find complete words, e.
1337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1366 offers also an advanced
1369 \begin_inset space ~
1373 \begin_inset space ~
1378 feature that is described in section
1379 \begin_inset space ~
1383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1385 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1392 \begin_layout Standard
1393 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1394 \begin_inset space \space{}
1398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1406 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1408 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1413 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1420 \begin_layout Standard
1424 arg "inset-select-all"
1427 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1428 When the cursor is inside an inset
1431 arg "inset-select-all"
1434 selects the content of the inset.
1438 arg "inset-select-all"
1441 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1446 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1449 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1453 \begin_layout Section
1455 \begin_inset Index idx
1458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1465 \begin_inset Index idx
1468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1477 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1484 \begin_layout Standard
1485 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1487 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1493 or the toolbar button
1499 to undo some mistake.
1500 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1502 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1505 or the toolbar button
1512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1519 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1523 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1526 \begin_layout Standard
1527 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1536 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1537 This is a consequence of the 100
1538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1541 step undo limit mentioned above.
1544 \begin_layout Standard
1553 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1555 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1559 \begin_layout Section
1561 \begin_inset Index idx
1564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1573 \begin_layout Standard
1574 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1577 \begin_layout Enumerate
1582 \begin_layout Itemize
1587 once anywhere in the edit window.
1588 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1592 \begin_layout Enumerate
1597 \begin_layout Itemize
1604 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1610 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1611 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1614 \begin_layout Itemize
1615 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1618 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1625 \begin_layout Enumerate
1626 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1630 \begin_layout Standard
1631 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1632 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1636 \begin_layout Section
1638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1640 name "sec:Navigating"
1645 \begin_inset Index idx
1648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1657 \begin_layout Standard
1659 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1732 \begin_layout Subsection
1734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1736 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1741 \begin_inset Index idx
1744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1745 Navigating ! Outline
1751 \begin_inset Index idx
1754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1763 \begin_layout Standard
1764 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1765 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1766 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1768 \begin_inset space ~
1772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1774 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1778 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1779 \begin_inset space ~
1783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1785 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1790 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1794 \begin_layout Standard
1795 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1796 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1797 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1798 dialog and to modify the citation.
1801 \begin_layout Standard
1802 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1804 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1805 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1813 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1818 you further to control the display.
1823 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1824 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1830 option keeps it in the current view state.
1831 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1832 \begin_inset space ~
1835 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1839 3, the subsections of sections
1840 \begin_inset space ~
1843 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1848 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1853 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1863 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1866 \begin_layout Standard
1873 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1874 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1888 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1889 So, for example, you can move section
1890 \begin_inset space ~
1894 \begin_inset space ~
1897 2.4 or after section
1898 \begin_inset space ~
1903 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1916 (or the corresponding key bindings
1924 ) you can change the level of sections.
1925 So you can for example make section
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_layout Standard
1941 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1942 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1945 \begin_layout Subsection
1946 Horizontal Scrolling
1947 \begin_inset Index idx
1950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1951 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1959 \begin_layout Standard
1961 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1967 \begin_inset space \space{}
1971 \begin_inset space ~
1974 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1975 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1976 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1980 \begin_layout Standard
1981 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1985 \begin_layout Itemize
1987 is used on a small tablet computer
1990 \begin_layout Itemize
1991 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_inset space ~
2016 \begin_layout Itemize
2017 Math constructs with long command names
2020 \begin_layout Standard
2021 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2022 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2024 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2025 windows so that table
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2032 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2037 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2039 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2040 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2043 \begin_layout Standard
2044 \begin_inset Float table
2050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2051 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2056 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2060 Horizontal scrolling test.
2068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2070 \begin_inset Tabular
2071 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2072 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2117 \begin_layout Section
2118 Input/Word Completion
2119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2121 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_layout Standard
2172 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2174 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2175 is used to propose completions.
2178 \begin_layout Standard
2179 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2182 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2187 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2194 \begin_inset space ~
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2203 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2213 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2223 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2224 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2225 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2226 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2229 \begin_layout Standard
2231 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2232 completions available.
2237 key to accept a proposed completion.
2238 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2239 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2240 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2247 \begin_layout Standard
2248 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2249 ing options for text.
2250 The special math option
2254 enables characters to be composed.
2255 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2256 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2259 , you can then input the characters
2260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2271 to a formula to get it.
2272 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2273 of the math toolbar.
2274 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2278 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2279 's installation folder.
2280 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2289 \begin_layout Section
2291 \begin_inset Index idx
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2333 \begin_inset Index idx
2336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2367 \begin_layout Standard
2368 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2382 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2385 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2389 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2390 \begin_inset space ~
2394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2396 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2403 \begin_layout Standard
2407 \begin_inset space ~
2415 \begin_inset space ~
2436 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2440 \begin_layout Labeling
2441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2445 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2446 LatexCommand nomenclature
2448 description "Tabulator key"
2454 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2456 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2457 \begin_inset space ~
2461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2463 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2470 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2474 , especially section
2475 \begin_inset space ~
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "subsec:Lists"
2487 If you are still confused, look in the
2492 \begin_inset Newline newline
2500 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2501 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2505 \begin_layout Labeling
2506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2510 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2511 LatexCommand nomenclature
2513 description "Escape key"
2520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2527 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2528 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2531 \begin_layout Labeling
2532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2542 \begin_inset space ~
2549 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2550 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2554 \begin_layout Standard
2555 There are three modifier keys:
2558 \begin_layout Labeling
2559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2577 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2578 LatexCommand nomenclature
2580 description "Control key"
2584 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2585 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2589 \begin_layout Itemize
2598 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2626 \begin_layout Labeling
2627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2645 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2646 LatexCommand nomenclature
2648 description "Shift key"
2652 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2653 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2656 \begin_layout Labeling
2657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2675 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2676 LatexCommand nomenclature
2678 description "Alt or Meta key"
2682 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2683 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2684 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2690 \begin_inset Newline newline
2693 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2695 menu accelerator keys
2698 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2699 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2703 \begin_layout Standard
2704 For example, the sequence
2705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2715 \begin_inset space ~
2721 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2748 \begin_inset space ~
2754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2764 \begin_layout Standard
2769 manual lists all other things bound to the
2777 \begin_layout Standard
2778 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2780 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2781 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2782 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2783 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2784 The \SpecialChar LyX
2785 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2786 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2787 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2789 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2805 followed by a capital
2812 \begin_layout Chapter
2815 \begin_inset Index idx
2818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2828 \begin_layout Section
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Subsection
2846 \begin_layout Standard
2847 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2848 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2849 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2850 numbering schemes, and so on.
2851 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2852 and format the title of your document differently.
2855 \begin_layout Standard
2860 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2861 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2862 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2863 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2864 picks one for you by default.
2865 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2868 \begin_layout Subsection
2870 \begin_inset Index idx
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2882 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2889 \begin_layout Standard
2890 You can select a class using the
2892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2893 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2897 \begin_inset Index idx
2900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2907 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2915 \begin_layout Standard
2916 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2921 \begin_layout Description
2922 Article for basic articles
2925 \begin_layout Description
2926 Report for basic reports
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Book for writing a book
2933 \begin_layout Description
2934 Letter for US-style letters
2937 \begin_layout Standard
2938 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2939 only uses if you have installed
2940 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2941 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2942 distributions will include
2944 Here are some of the classes.
2945 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2947 Special Document Classes
2956 \begin_layout Description
2957 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2965 \begin_layout Description
2966 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2972 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2973 There are three article layouts available.
2974 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2975 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2976 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2977 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2982 sequential numbering
2983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2986 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2987 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2988 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2989 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2992 \begin_layout Description
2993 Beamer Layout for presentations
2996 \begin_layout Description
2997 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2998 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2999 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3000 with \SpecialChar LyX
3004 \begin_layout Description
3005 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3008 \begin_layout Description
3010 \begin_inset space ~
3013 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3016 \begin_layout Description
3017 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Foils Used to make transparencies
3024 \begin_layout Description
3025 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3026 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3027 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3028 with \SpecialChar LyX
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3034 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3047 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3048 (Is used by this document.)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3059 \begin_layout Description
3064 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3065 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3067 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Slides Used to make transparencies
3075 \begin_layout Description
3077 \begin_inset space ~
3080 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3081 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3088 \begin_layout Standard
3089 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3091 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3093 Special Document Classes
3100 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3101 of the document classes.
3104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3108 \begin_layout Standard
3109 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3114 \begin_inset Index idx
3117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3134 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3135 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3137 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3140 \begin_layout Standard
3143 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3148 , are highly specialized.
3150 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3151 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3152 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3153 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3154 by some document class.
3155 There are just too many of them.
3156 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3159 \begin_layout Standard
3160 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3168 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3169 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3170 document class for a new file.
3172 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3175 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3182 manual for information on how to install them.
3183 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3189 \begin_layout Standard
3190 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3191 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3192 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3193 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3194 class files to be used for dissertation
3195 s submitted to those universities.
3196 The \SpecialChar LyX
3197 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3199 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3203 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3209 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3216 name "subsec:Modules"
3221 \begin_inset Index idx
3224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 \begin_layout Standard
3234 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3235 chosen document class.
3236 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3237 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3244 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3248 \begin_inset Index idx
3251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3258 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3262 \begin_layout Standard
3263 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3264 packages or file format converters that are not always
3265 installed by default.
3267 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3268 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3269 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3270 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3272 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3273 file without the missing prerequisites.
3274 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3275 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3278 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3282 \begin_inset Index idx
3285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3286 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3292 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3297 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3300 \begin_layout Standard
3301 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3309 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3311 will advise you about these things.
3319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3323 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3328 \begin_inset Index idx
3331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3332 Document ! Local Layout
3340 \begin_layout Standard
3341 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3342 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3343 : They are intended to be used in
3344 a variety of different documents.
3345 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3346 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3347 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3348 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3349 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3351 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3369 manual for information on how to use it.
3372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3376 \begin_layout Standard
3377 Each class has a default set of options.
3378 Here's a quick table describing them:
3381 \begin_layout Standard
3382 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3388 \begin_layout Standard
3390 \begin_inset Tabular
3391 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3392 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3393 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3394 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3396 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3397 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3851 \begin_layout Standard
3852 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3858 \begin_layout Standard
3859 You're probably also wondering what
3860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3864 \begin_inset space ~
3868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3872 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3873 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3878 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3883 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3893 headings, there are also
3901 headings, and so on.
3902 We will describe these headings fully in section
3903 \begin_inset space ~
3907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3909 reference "subsec:Headings"
3916 \begin_layout Subsection
3918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3920 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3925 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 \begin_inset Index idx
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Standard
3948 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3957 \begin_inset space ~
3965 \begin_inset space ~
3970 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3972 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3973 doesn't support special options you want to
3974 use for your document.
3975 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3976 -class and its options, you have to read
3980 \begin_layout Standard
3984 \begin_inset space ~
3991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4002 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4003 You can choose between the following five options:
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 Use default page style of current class.
4015 \begin_layout Labeling
4016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4021 No page numbers or headings.
4024 \begin_layout Labeling
4025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4033 \begin_layout Labeling
4034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4039 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4040 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4041 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4042 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4045 \begin_layout Labeling
4046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4051 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4052 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4058 \begin_inset Index idx
4061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4063 -packages ! fancyhdr
4069 How they are defined is explained in section
4070 \begin_inset space ~
4074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4076 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4083 \begin_layout Standard
4084 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4098 \begin_layout Subsection
4099 Paper Size and Orientation
4100 \begin_inset Index idx
4103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 Document ! Paper size
4110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4112 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4119 \begin_layout Standard
4120 You can find the following options in the menu
4123 \begin_inset space ~
4130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4134 \begin_inset Index idx
4137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4146 \begin_layout Labeling
4147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4151 \begin_inset space ~
4156 What size paper to print on.
4161 \begin_layout Itemize
4167 \begin_layout Itemize
4173 \begin_layout Itemize
4179 \begin_layout Itemize
4185 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 US letter, US legal, US executive
4191 \begin_layout Itemize
4197 \begin_layout Itemize
4204 \begin_layout Labeling
4205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4210 To choose whether to output as
4221 \begin_layout Labeling
4222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4226 \begin_inset space ~
4231 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4232 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4235 \begin_layout Subsection
4237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4239 name "subsec:Margins"
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4254 \begin_inset Index idx
4257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4267 Paper margins are set in the menu
4269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset Index idx
4276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4287 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4288 the paper format and the font size into account.
4291 \begin_layout Subsection
4295 \begin_layout Standard
4296 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4302 That includes the paragraph environments.
4303 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4304 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4305 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4307 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4316 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4318 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4319 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4320 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4323 \begin_layout Section
4324 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4325 \begin_inset Index idx
4328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4329 Paragraph ! Indentation
4337 \begin_layout Subsection
4339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4341 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4348 \begin_layout Standard
4349 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4350 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4353 \begin_layout Standard
4354 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4355 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4356 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4357 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4361 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4367 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4368 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4369 language than English.
4371 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4374 \begin_layout Standard
4375 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4376 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4377 into \SpecialChar LyX
4379 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4382 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4384 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4385 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4386 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4393 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4394 goes to produce a printable file.
4399 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4401 gives you the ability globally to change
4405 these pre-coded spacings.
4406 We will explain more later.
4409 \begin_layout Subsection
4410 Paragraph Separation
4411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4413 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4418 \begin_inset Index idx
4421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4422 Paragraph ! Separation
4430 \begin_layout Standard
4438 \begin_inset space ~
4446 \begin_inset space ~
4453 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4457 \begin_inset Index idx
4460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4466 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4469 \begin_layout Subsection
4473 \begin_layout Standard
4474 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4477 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset space ~
4484 dialog and toggle the
4487 \begin_inset space ~
4492 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4495 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4499 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4500 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4504 \begin_layout Standard
4505 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4506 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4509 \begin_layout Subsection
4511 \begin_inset Index idx
4514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4515 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4523 \begin_layout Standard
4526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4530 \begin_inset Index idx
4533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4542 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4546 \begin_inset space ~
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4562 \begin_inset Index idx
4565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4567 -packages ! setspace
4572 installed to use this feature.
4577 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4579 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4581 \begin_inset space ~
4586 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4587 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4590 \begin_layout Section
4591 Paragraph Environments
4592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4594 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4599 \begin_inset Index idx
4602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4603 Paragraph ! Environments
4609 \begin_inset Index idx
4612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4613 Paragraph environments|(
4621 \begin_layout Subsection
4625 \begin_layout Standard
4626 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4629 \begin_layout Standard
4638 } \SpecialChar ldots
4648 \begin_inset Newline newline
4651 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4653 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4654 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4655 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4664 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4667 \begin_layout Standard
4668 A paragraph environment is simply a
4669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4676 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4677 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4678 scheme, labels, and so on.
4679 Additionally, you can
4680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4687 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4688 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4689 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4690 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4692 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4694 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4697 \begin_layout Standard
4698 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4699 \begin_inset Graphics
4700 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4706 at the left end of the toolbar.
4708 will change the environment of the
4712 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4713 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4714 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4718 \begin_layout Standard
4727 create a new paragraph using the
4731 paragraph environment.
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 because if you are in one of these environments:
4743 \begin_layout Itemize
4749 \begin_layout Itemize
4755 \begin_layout Itemize
4761 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4773 \begin_layout Itemize
4779 \begin_layout Itemize
4785 \begin_layout Standard
4787 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4791 , rather than resetting it to
4796 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4797 \begin_inset space ~
4801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4803 reference "sec:Nesting"
4810 \begin_layout Subsection
4814 \begin_layout Standard
4815 The default paragraph environment is
4820 It creates a plain paragraph.
4822 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4823 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4824 this manual) are in the
4831 \begin_layout Standard
4832 You can nest a paragraph using the
4836 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4844 \begin_layout Subsection
4846 \begin_inset Index idx
4849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4858 \begin_layout Standard
4859 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4860 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4869 for thanks or contact information.
4870 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4871 places all of this on a separate page
4872 along with today's date.
4873 For other types of documents, the title
4874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4881 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4885 \begin_layout Standard
4887 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4901 Here's how you use them:
4904 \begin_layout Itemize
4905 Put the title of your document in the
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4913 Put the author name in the
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4922 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4928 Note that using this environment is optional.
4929 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4930 will automatically insert today's date.
4931 If you don't want a date, use the option
4933 Suppress default date on front page
4937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4938 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4940 \begin_inset space ~
4948 \begin_layout Standard
4949 You can use footnotes to insert
4950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4957 or contact information.
4960 \begin_layout Subsection
4962 \begin_inset Index idx
4965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4974 name "subsec:Headings"
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4982 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4984 takes care of the numbering for you.
4987 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4989 \begin_inset Index idx
4992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4993 Section headings ! Numbered
5001 \begin_layout Standard
5002 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5006 \begin_layout Enumerate
5012 \begin_layout Enumerate
5018 \begin_layout Enumerate
5024 \begin_layout Enumerate
5030 \begin_layout Enumerate
5036 \begin_layout Enumerate
5042 \begin_layout Enumerate
5048 \begin_layout Standard
5050 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5051 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5052 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5055 \begin_layout Standard
5056 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5057 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5058 You group the book into chapters.
5060 does a similar grouping:
5063 \begin_layout Itemize
5068 is divided into either
5079 \begin_layout Itemize
5091 \begin_layout Itemize
5103 \begin_layout Itemize
5115 \begin_layout Itemize
5127 \begin_layout Itemize
5139 \begin_layout Standard
5140 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5148 Not all document types use the
5152 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5157 is the top-level heading.
5165 \begin_layout Standard
5170 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5171 labels it with its number,
5172 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5174 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5188 \begin_inset Index idx
5191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5192 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5200 \begin_layout Standard
5201 The unnumbered section headings have a
5202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5209 at the end of their name.
5210 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5211 the table of contents, see section
5212 \begin_inset space ~
5216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5226 Changing the Numbering
5227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5229 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5236 \begin_layout Standard
5237 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5238 in the Table of Contents.
5239 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5241 Just as certain classes start with
5255 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5265 This is something you can change.
5268 \begin_layout Standard
5271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5275 \begin_inset Index idx
5278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5287 \begin_inset space ~
5291 \begin_inset space ~
5296 you will see two counters.
5301 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5302 numbers a section heading.
5303 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5308 Short Titles of Headings
5309 \begin_inset Index idx
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5313 Section headings ! Short titles
5319 \begin_inset Argument 1
5322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5331 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5338 \begin_layout Standard
5339 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5340 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5341 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5342 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5345 \begin_layout Standard
5347 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5348 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5349 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5350 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5355 \begin_inset space ~
5361 This will insert a box labeled
5362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5366 \begin_inset space ~
5370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5373 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5374 This also works for captions inside floats.
5375 There can only be one short title per title.
5378 \begin_layout Standard
5379 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5386 \begin_layout Standard
5387 The following information applies to all section headings:
5390 \begin_layout Itemize
5391 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5394 \begin_layout Itemize
5395 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5398 \begin_layout Itemize
5399 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5402 \begin_layout Itemize
5403 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5406 \begin_layout Subsection
5410 \begin_layout Standard
5412 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5426 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5427 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5428 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5429 the text they contain.
5430 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5438 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5441 \begin_layout Standard
5442 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5451 when you start a new paragraph.
5452 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5456 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5457 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5458 have to change back to the
5462 environment yourself.
5465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5474 \begin_inset Index idx
5477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5486 \begin_layout Standard
5487 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5488 time for the differences.
5497 are identical except for one difference:
5501 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5510 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5513 \begin_layout Standard
5514 Here's an example of the
5527 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5529 See – no indentation!
5533 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5534 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5535 the other paragraph.
5538 \begin_layout Standard
5539 Here's another example, this time in the
5546 \begin_layout Quotation
5552 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5553 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5554 the first line, then
5558 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5562 you were quoting other text.
5565 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 Here's a new paragraph.
5567 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5568 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5571 \begin_layout Standard
5572 As the examples show,
5576 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5577 They should put quotes in the
5582 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5586 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset Index idx
5604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5620 \begin_layout Standard
5625 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5631 \begin_inset Newline newline
5634 Which I did not rehearse!
5638 It could be much worse.
5639 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5641 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5642 indented a bit more than the first.
5643 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5649 \begin_inset Newline newline
5652 And make things look fine
5653 \begin_inset Newline newline
5659 arg "newline-insert newline"
5665 \begin_layout Standard
5670 does not indent both margins.
5671 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5672 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5675 arg "newline-insert newline"
5681 \begin_layout Subsection
5683 \begin_inset Index idx
5686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5702 \begin_layout Standard
5704 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5714 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5715 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5724 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5725 lets you provide your own label.
5726 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5727 describing some general features of all four of them.
5730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5734 \begin_layout Standard
5735 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5737 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5738 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5747 reset the environment to
5751 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5752 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5753 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5757 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5761 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5768 \begin_layout Standard
5769 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5770 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5771 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5773 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5774 you read all of section
5775 \begin_inset space ~
5779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5781 reference "sec:Nesting"
5788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5790 \begin_inset Index idx
5793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5809 \begin_layout Standard
5810 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5814 paragraph environment.
5815 It has the following properties:
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5825 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5828 \begin_layout Itemize
5829 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 The items can have any length.
5836 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5837 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 environment inside another
5853 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5861 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5866 \begin_layout Itemize
5868 \begin_inset space ~
5872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5874 reference "sec:Nesting"
5878 for a full explanation of nesting.
5882 \begin_layout Standard
5883 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5892 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5897 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5900 \begin_layout Itemize
5901 The label for the first level
5905 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the second level is a dash.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back out to the third level.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 Back to the second level.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 Back to the outermost level.
5938 \begin_layout Standard
5939 These are the default labels for an
5944 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5949 dialog in the submenu
5954 \begin_inset Index idx
5957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5963 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5967 \begin_layout Standard
5968 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5969 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5971 \begin_inset space ~
5975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5977 reference "sec:Nesting"
5984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5986 \begin_inset Index idx
5989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5998 name "sec:Enumerate"
6005 \begin_layout Standard
6010 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6011 It has these properties:
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6015 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6020 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6024 \begin_layout Enumerate
6026 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 environment resets the counter to one.
6037 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6052 Items can have any length.
6055 \begin_layout Enumerate
6056 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6059 \begin_layout Enumerate
6060 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6063 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6068 \begin_layout Standard
6077 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6079 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6080 labels the four different levels in an
6087 \begin_layout Enumerate
6088 The first level of an
6092 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6106 \begin_layout Enumerate
6107 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the third level
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 Back to the second level.
6126 \begin_layout Enumerate
6127 Back to the outermost level.
6130 \begin_layout Standard
6131 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6135 environment, see section
6136 \begin_inset space ~
6140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6142 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6147 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6151 \begin_layout Standard
6152 There is more to nesting
6156 environments than we've stated here.
6157 You should read section
6158 \begin_inset space ~
6162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6164 reference "sec:Nesting"
6168 to learn more about nesting.
6171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6173 \begin_inset Index idx
6176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6185 \begin_layout Standard
6186 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6190 list has no fixed label.
6191 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6200 of the first line as the label.
6204 \begin_layout Description
6205 Example: This is an example of the
6212 \begin_layout Standard
6214 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6218 \begin_layout Standard
6220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6227 it is meant that the first usage of the
6231 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6233 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6241 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6247 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6249 \begin_inset space ~
6255 \begin_inset space ~
6259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6261 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6265 for more information.) Here is an example:
6268 \begin_layout Description
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6273 Example: This one shows how to use a
6276 \begin_inset space ~
6288 \begin_layout Description
6289 Usage: You should use the
6293 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6294 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6296 It's not a good idea to use a
6300 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6301 You're better off using
6313 paragraphs into them.
6316 \begin_layout Description
6317 Nesting: You can nest
6321 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6325 \begin_layout Standard
6326 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6327 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6328 them from the first line.
6331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6333 \begin_inset Index idx
6336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6350 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6351 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6355 \begin_layout Standard
6364 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6366 Here are its properties:
6369 \begin_layout Labeling
6370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6372 \begin_inset space ~
6375 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6384 of each line as the item label.
6389 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6390 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6391 space as described above.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6396 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6397 uses different margins for the item label and the
6398 body of the item text.
6399 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6400 label width plus a little extra space.
6404 \begin_layout Labeling
6405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6407 \begin_inset space ~
6410 width \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6412 If the label width is larger, the label
6413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6420 into the first line.
6421 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6422 margin of the rest of the item text.
6425 \begin_layout Labeling
6426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6431 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6436 environment has the same left margin.
6437 \begin_inset Newline newline
6440 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6443 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6445 \begin_inset space ~
6450 dialog (toolbar button
6453 arg "layout-paragraph"
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 determines the default label width.
6466 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6475 multiple times instead.
6476 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6486 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6489 \begin_inset space ~
6494 every time you alter a label in a
6499 \begin_inset Newline newline
6502 The predefined default width is the length of
6503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6511 \begin_inset space ~
6517 \begin_layout Standard
6522 list the same way as the
6526 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6532 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6536 \begin_layout Standard
6541 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6542 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6544 \begin_inset space ~
6548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6550 reference "sec:Nesting"
6554 to learn about nesting.
6557 \begin_layout Standard
6558 There is yet another feature of the
6562 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6563 left-justifies the item labels by
6565 You can use additional
6569 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6570 justifies the item label.
6575 are documented in section
6576 \begin_inset space ~
6580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6582 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6587 Here are some examples:
6590 \begin_layout Labeling
6591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6592 Left The default for
6599 \begin_layout Labeling
6600 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6601 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6608 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6611 \begin_layout Labeling
6612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6613 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6617 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6624 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6627 \begin_layout Subsection
6629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6631 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6636 \begin_inset Index idx
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 \begin_layout Standard
6649 The features described in this section require that the module
6651 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6653 is loaded in the document settings.
6654 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6660 \begin_inset Index idx
6663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6665 -packages ! enumitem
6673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6674 Custom Enumerate Lists
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6679 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6687 \begin_layout Standard
6689 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6695 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6696 There you add the command
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6707 \begin_layout Standard
6719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6720 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6721 Code, look at section
6722 \begin_inset space ~
6726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6728 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6741 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6748 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6749 For capital Roman numerals replace
6761 in the command above.
6762 For Arabic numerals use
6770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6777 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6792 \begin_layout Standard
6794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6802 You can only number 26
6803 \begin_inset space ~
6806 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6814 \begin_layout Standard
6815 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6816 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6819 \begin_layout Standard
6820 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6823 \begin_layout Enumerate
6824 \begin_inset Argument 1
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 \begin_layout Enumerate
6854 \begin_inset Argument 1
6857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6880 \begin_layout Enumerate
6885 \begin_layout Enumerate
6886 \begin_inset Argument 1
6889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6913 \begin_layout Enumerate
6914 \begin_inset Argument 1
6917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6943 \begin_layout Standard
6944 For this list these commands were used:
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6958 \begin_inset Newline newline
6966 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_inset Newline newline
6984 \begin_layout Standard
6991 makes the label emphasized and
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7001 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7009 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7010 lists until you change the definition.
7018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7020 \begin_inset Index idx
7023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7032 \begin_layout Standard
7033 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7036 \begin_layout Enumerate
7037 \begin_inset Argument 1
7040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_inset Note Note
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7063 goes back to default numbering
7071 \begin_layout Enumerate
7075 \begin_layout Standard
7079 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7083 \begin_layout Standard
7084 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7089 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7090 to indicate that it is a resumed
7091 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7092 , but in the output.
7095 \begin_layout Standard
7096 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7104 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7114 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7116 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7117 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7118 of a normal enumeration.
7119 There, insert the command
7122 \begin_layout Standard
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7133 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7137 \begin_layout Enumerate
7141 \begin_layout Enumerate
7145 \begin_layout Standard
7146 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7149 \begin_layout Enumerate
7150 \begin_inset Argument 1
7153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 This enumeration starts at 4
7172 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7174 \begin_inset Index idx
7177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7187 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7189 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7192 \begin_layout Itemize
7196 \begin_layout Itemize
7197 with standard spacing
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7203 Add there the command
7207 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_inset Argument 1
7214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Itemize
7237 \begin_layout Itemize
7241 \begin_layout Standard
7242 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7249 \begin_inset Index idx
7252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 -packages ! enumitem
7260 For more information see its documentation,
7261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7270 \begin_layout Standard
7271 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7273 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7274 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7278 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7281 \begin_layout Enumerate
7282 \begin_inset Argument 1
7285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7293 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7306 \begin_layout Enumerate
7307 with negative indentation
7310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7311 Further Customization
7312 \begin_inset Index idx
7315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 Lists ! Customization
7324 \begin_layout Standard
7325 You can also change the style of description lists.
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 changes the description label font, the command
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7346 sets the list style.
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 An example where the command
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7358 itshape, style=nextline
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7365 \begin_layout Description
7367 \begin_inset space ~
7371 \begin_inset Argument 1
7374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7380 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7382 itshape, style=nextline
7392 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7393 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7397 \begin_layout Description
7399 \begin_inset space ~
7402 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7403 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7404 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7407 \begin_layout Standard
7408 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7414 \begin_inset Index idx
7417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7419 -packages ! enumitem
7425 For more information see its documentation
7426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7435 \begin_layout Subsection
7437 \begin_inset Index idx
7440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7449 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7451 \begin_inset space ~
7454 Address: An Overview
7457 \begin_layout Standard
7458 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7459 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7473 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7474 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7475 gags on the document.
7476 In contrast, you can use the
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7488 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7489 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7494 Of course, you're not limited to using
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7510 \begin_inset space ~
7515 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7516 some European academic papers.
7519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7523 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7530 \begin_layout Standard
7535 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7536 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7540 \begin_inset space ~
7545 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7546 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7547 Here's an example of each:
7550 \begin_layout Right Address
7552 \begin_inset Newline newline
7556 \begin_inset Newline newline
7560 \begin_inset Newline newline
7563 When is it? What is today?
7566 \begin_layout Standard
7570 \begin_inset space ~
7576 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7578 the largest block of text on a single line.
7579 Here's an example of the
7586 \begin_layout Address
7588 \begin_inset Newline newline
7591 Where do I send this
7592 \begin_inset Newline newline
7595 Your post office and country
7598 \begin_layout Standard
7599 As you can see, both
7606 \begin_inset space ~
7611 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7616 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7617 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7623 This makes sense, since
7631 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7632 Thus, you have to use
7639 arg "newline-insert newline"
7644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7645 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7647 \begin_inset space ~
7651 \begin_inset space ~
7656 ) to start a new line in an
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7671 \begin_layout Subsection
7675 \begin_layout Standard
7676 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7677 or list of references.
7679 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7684 \begin_inset Index idx
7687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7696 \begin_layout Standard
7701 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7702 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7703 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7704 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7718 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7719 The book document classes ignores the
7723 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7727 in a letter document class.
7730 \begin_layout Standard
7735 environment does several things for you.
7736 First, it puts the centered label
7737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7745 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7747 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7748 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7749 the subsequent text.
7750 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7752 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7756 \begin_layout Standard
7757 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7761 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7762 The new paragraph will still be in the
7767 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7768 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7772 \begin_inset Float figure
7777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7779 \begin_inset Graphics
7780 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7788 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7793 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7814 \begin_layout Standard
7815 We would love to demonstrate the
7819 environment, but since this document is in the
7820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7827 class, we can't do this.
7828 We inserted it therefore as figure
7829 \begin_inset space ~
7833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7835 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7840 If you have never heard of an
7841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7848 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7853 \begin_inset Index idx
7856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7865 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7872 \begin_layout Standard
7877 environment is used to list references.
7878 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7879 only use it at the end of the document.
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7892 When you first open a
7896 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7897 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7913 depending on the document class.
7914 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7915 Each paragraph of the
7919 environment is a bibliography entry.
7924 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7925 Each new paragraph is still in the
7932 \begin_layout Standard
7933 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7934 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7936 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7938 handling, have a look at section
7939 \begin_inset space ~
7943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7945 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7952 \begin_layout Subsection
7953 Special Environments
7956 \begin_layout Standard
7958 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7959 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7967 \begin_inset Index idx
7970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7980 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7987 \begin_layout Standard
7993 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7995 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8000 key as a fixed whitespace.
8004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8017 \begin_inset space ~
8022 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8040 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8043 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8046 arg "newline-insert newline"
8063 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8064 So, when you finish using the
8069 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8070 Also, you can nest the
8075 environment inside of others.
8078 \begin_layout Standard
8079 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8082 \begin_layout Itemize
8086 arg "newline-insert newline"
8089 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8094 \begin_inset space \space{}
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8110 \begin_layout Itemize
8114 arg "newline-insert newline"
8124 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8130 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8132 You must put at least one
8136 in any line you want blank.
8137 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8141 \begin_layout Itemize
8142 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8146 since that will insert
8151 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8154 arg "self-insert \""
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8164 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8168 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8172 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8181 printf("Hello World!
8186 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout Standard
8195 This is just the standard
8196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8207 \begin_layout Standard
8213 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8215 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8216 as if you used a typewriter.
8217 \begin_inset Index idx
8220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8221 Paragraph environments|)
8226 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8229 Program Code Listings
8234 \begin_inset space ~
8242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8246 \begin_inset Index idx
8249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8258 \begin_layout Standard
8263 environment is similar to the
8268 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8269 computer console text.
8274 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8288 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8289 you can have empty lines.
8302 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 have a certain language and a text style
8306 \begin_layout Itemize
8307 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8308 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8309 and \SpecialChar TeX
8313 \begin_layout Standard
8314 Because of these properties
8318 works like a typewriter.
8322 \begin_layout Verbatim
8327 \begin_layout Verbatim
8331 The following 2 lines are empty:
8334 \begin_layout Verbatim
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8349 \begin_layout Standard
8354 environment is identical to
8358 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8359 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8366 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8371 \begin_layout Section
8372 Nesting Environments
8373 \begin_inset Index idx
8376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8377 Nesting ! Environments
8383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8392 \begin_layout Subsection
8396 \begin_layout Standard
8398 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8400 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8402 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8404 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8416 \begin_layout Enumerate
8420 \begin_layout Enumerate
8425 \begin_layout Enumerate
8429 \begin_layout Enumerate
8434 \begin_layout Enumerate
8438 \begin_layout Standard
8439 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8440 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8442 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8444 \begin_inset space ~
8448 \begin_inset space ~
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8465 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8467 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8470 arg "depth-increment"
8476 arg "depth-decrement"
8490 arg "depth-increment"
8496 arg "depth-decrement"
8500 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8501 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8505 \begin_layout Standard
8506 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8507 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8508 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8509 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8510 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8513 \begin_layout Standard
8514 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8516 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8518 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8521 \begin_layout Subsection
8522 What You Can and Can't Nest
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8527 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8532 than a simple yes or no.
8533 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 Completely unnestable
8540 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8545 \begin_layout Itemize
8546 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8550 \begin_layout Standard
8551 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8552 environments have them:
8555 \begin_layout Description
8556 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8557 Can't nest into them.
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Description
8594 \begin_inset space ~
8597 Nestable You can nest them.
8598 You can nest other things into them.
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Itemize
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Description
8665 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8666 You can't nest anything into them.
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Itemize
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_inset space ~
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Standard
8766 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8774 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8784 \begin_inset space ~
8787 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8788 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8789 nested section headings violate this.
8797 \begin_layout Subsection
8798 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8799 \begin_inset Index idx
8802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8803 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8811 \begin_layout Standard
8812 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8813 affected by nesting anyhow.
8817 \begin_layout Itemize
8821 \begin_layout Itemize
8825 \begin_layout Itemize
8829 \begin_layout Standard
8831 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8839 Figures and tables in
8843 are not affected by this.
8848 Have a look at section
8849 \begin_inset space ~
8853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8855 reference "sec:Floats"
8859 for more information about
8866 \begin_layout Standard
8868 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8869 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8873 \begin_layout Standard
8874 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8882 of its own, it behaves just like a
8883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8890 paragraph environment.
8891 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 Here's an example with a table:
8899 \begin_layout Enumerate
8904 \begin_layout Enumerate
8905 This is (a) and it's nested.
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8910 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8916 \begin_layout Standard
8918 \begin_inset Tabular
8919 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8920 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8921 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8922 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9006 \begin_layout Standard
9007 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9014 \begin_layout Enumerate
9016 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9020 \begin_layout Enumerate
9024 \begin_layout Standard
9025 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9028 \begin_layout Enumerate
9033 \begin_layout Enumerate
9034 This is (a) and it's nested.
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9039 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9047 \begin_inset Tabular
9048 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9049 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9050 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9051 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9135 \begin_layout Standard
9136 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9149 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9152 \begin_layout Enumerate
9156 \begin_layout Standard
9157 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9161 \begin_layout Standard
9162 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9165 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Enumerate
9174 This is (a) and it's nested.
9177 \begin_layout Standard
9178 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9184 \begin_layout Standard
9186 \begin_inset Tabular
9187 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9188 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9275 \begin_layout Standard
9276 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9282 \begin_layout Enumerate
9284 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9291 \begin_layout Enumerate
9295 \begin_layout Standard
9296 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9302 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9303 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9307 \begin_layout Subsection
9308 Usage and General Features
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9312 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9313 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9322 is the innermost possible depth.
9323 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9327 level #1 – outermost
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Enumerate
9341 \begin_layout Enumerate
9346 \begin_layout Itemize
9351 \begin_layout Itemize
9360 \begin_layout Standard
9361 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9362 both of them in the example.
9363 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9373 For example, if we tried to nest another
9378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9385 , we would get errors.
9388 \begin_layout Subsection
9390 \begin_inset Index idx
9393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9402 \begin_layout Standard
9403 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9404 We have several examples of nested environments.
9405 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9410 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9413 \begin_layout Labeling
9414 \labelwidthstring MMM
9415 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9424 \begin_layout Labeling
9425 \labelwidthstring MMM
9426 #2-a This is level #2.
9427 We created it by using
9430 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9436 arg "depth-increment"
9443 \begin_layout Labeling
9444 \labelwidthstring MMM
9445 #3-a This is level #3.
9446 This time, we just enter
9453 arg "depth-increment"
9457 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9461 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9467 arg "depth-increment"
9474 \begin_layout Standard
9479 environment, nested inside of
9480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9488 So, it's at level #4.
9489 We did this by entering
9492 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9498 arg "depth-increment"
9501 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9506 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9522 \begin_layout Standard
9527 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9530 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9536 \begin_layout Labeling
9537 \labelwidthstring MMM
9538 #4-a This is level #4.
9542 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9545 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9550 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9554 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9559 keep nesting things inside
9560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9571 \begin_layout Labeling
9572 \labelwidthstring MMM
9573 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9578 \begin_layout Labeling
9579 \labelwidthstring MMM
9580 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9581 and this is level #6.
9582 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9586 \begin_layout Labeling
9587 \labelwidthstring MMM
9588 #5-b Back to level #5.
9592 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9598 arg "depth-decrement"
9605 \begin_layout Labeling
9606 \labelwidthstring MMM
9610 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9616 arg "depth-decrement"
9619 , we're back at level #4.
9623 \begin_layout Labeling
9624 \labelwidthstring MMM
9625 #3-b Back to level #3.
9626 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9630 \begin_layout Labeling
9631 \labelwidthstring MMM
9632 #2-b Back to level #2.
9637 \begin_layout Labeling
9638 \labelwidthstring MMM
9639 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9640 After this sentence, we will enter
9644 and change the paragraph environment back to
9651 \begin_layout Standard
9652 We could have also used the
9668 environment in place of the
9673 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9676 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9677 Example 2: Inheritance
9680 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9681 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9684 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 arg "depth-increment"
9697 \begin_inset Newline newline
9700 which, we will change to the
9708 \begin_layout Enumerate
9713 environment, at level #2.
9716 \begin_layout Enumerate
9717 Notice how the nested
9721 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9725 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9730 We ended this example by entering
9735 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9739 and reset the nesting depth by using
9742 arg "depth-decrement"
9748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9749 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9758 \begin_inset Argument 1
9761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9762 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9771 This is level #1, in an
9775 paragraph environment.
9776 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9780 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9791 arg "depth-increment"
9795 Now, what happens if we nest an
9799 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9800 label be? An asterisk?
9804 \begin_layout Itemize
9814 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9815 So, its label is a bullet.
9816 (We got here by using
9819 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9825 arg "depth-increment"
9828 , then changing the environment to
9836 \begin_layout Itemize
9837 Here's level #4, produced using
9840 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9846 arg "depth-increment"
9850 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9855 \begin_layout Enumerate
9858 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9863 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9867 , because we are in the
9875 environment (that is, it is an
9890 \begin_layout Enumerate
9895 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9896 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9901 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9904 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9907 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9910 \begin_layout Enumerate
9914 arg "depth-decrement"
9917 to decrease the depth after the next
9920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9929 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9934 \begin_layout Enumerate
9936 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9937 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9942 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9951 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9956 reset the counter for the label.
9960 \begin_layout Enumerate
9964 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9970 arg "depth-decrement"
9973 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9974 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9975 into the twofold-nested
9983 \begin_layout Enumerate
9984 The same thing happens if we do another
9987 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9993 arg "depth-decrement"
9996 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9999 \begin_layout Standard
10000 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10005 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10016 The number of other
10020 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10027 The same rule applies for the
10031 environment, as well.
10034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10035 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10038 \begin_layout Enumerate
10039 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10040 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10041 the same detail with how we did it.
10050 \begin_layout Standard
10058 arg "depth-increment"
10065 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10066 the example in parentheses someplace.
10067 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10068 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10069 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10073 \begin_layout Enumerate
10078 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10082 \begin_layout Verse
10083 Now we will add verse.
10084 \begin_inset Newline newline
10087 It will get much worse.
10088 \begin_inset Newline newline
10098 arg "depth-increment"
10108 \begin_layout Verse
10109 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10110 \begin_inset Newline newline
10113 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10114 \begin_inset Newline newline
10120 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10128 \begin_layout Verse
10129 Here comes a table:
10133 \begin_layout Standard
10134 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10140 \begin_layout Standard
10142 \begin_inset Tabular
10143 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10144 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10146 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10231 \begin_layout Verse
10235 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10245 arg "depth-increment"
10251 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 \begin_inset Newline newline
10265 arg "depth-decrement"
10272 \begin_layout Enumerate
10277 : level #1) This is another item.
10278 Note that selecting a
10282 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10283 3 times to put the table inside the
10291 \begin_layout Quotation
10292 We're now ending the
10296 list and changing to
10301 We're still at level #1.
10302 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10303 The next set of paragraphs is a
10304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10311 We will nest both the
10318 \begin_inset space ~
10323 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10327 for the letter body.
10331 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10334 to preserve the depth.
10335 Remember that you need to use
10338 arg "newline-insert newline"
10341 to create multiple lines inside the
10348 \begin_inset space ~
10358 \begin_layout Right Address
10360 \begin_inset Newline newline
10363 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10364 \begin_inset Newline newline
10370 \begin_layout Address
10372 \begin_inset space ~
10378 \begin_layout Quotation
10379 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10383 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10384 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10385 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10386 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10387 as soon as possible.
10388 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10391 \begin_layout Quotation
10392 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10393 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10394 with your order, along with payment.
10397 \begin_layout Quotation
10398 We thank you again for your patience.
10401 \begin_layout Address
10403 \begin_inset Newline newline
10410 \begin_layout Quotation
10411 That ends that example!
10414 \begin_layout Standard
10415 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10416 gives you a lot of power with just
10418 We could have easily nested an
10439 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10442 \begin_layout Subsection
10444 \begin_inset Index idx
10447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10448 Nesting ! Separation
10454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10456 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10463 \begin_layout Standard
10464 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10466 For example you need two different enumerations:
10469 \begin_layout Enumerate
10474 \begin_layout Enumerate
10479 \begin_layout Enumerate
10483 \begin_layout Standard
10484 \begin_inset Separator plain
10490 \begin_layout Itemize
10496 \begin_layout Standard
10497 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10503 \begin_layout Enumerate
10507 \begin_layout Enumerate
10511 \begin_layout Enumerate
10515 \begin_layout Standard
10516 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10517 list item and use the menu
10519 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10520 Start New Environment
10523 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10524 ) and behind it the new list.
10527 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10528 Start New Parent Environment
10530 only appears if the item is nested.
10531 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10535 \begin_layout Standard
10536 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10537 (red arrow in LyX).
10538 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10539 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10542 \begin_layout Standard
10543 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10546 arg "paragraph-break"
10553 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10556 \begin_layout Section
10557 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10558 \begin_inset Index idx
10561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10570 \begin_layout Standard
10571 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10572 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10574 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10575 be broken at the end of a line.
10576 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10580 \begin_layout Subsection
10582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10584 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10589 \begin_inset Index idx
10592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10601 \begin_layout Standard
10602 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10603 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10604 ) not to break the line at
10606 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10609 \begin_layout Quote
10610 Further documentation is given in section
10611 \begin_inset Newline newline
10615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10617 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10625 \begin_layout Standard
10626 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10641 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10650 A protected space is set with
10652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10653 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10655 \begin_inset space ~
10663 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10669 \begin_layout Subsection
10671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10673 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10678 \begin_inset Index idx
10681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10682 Spacing ! Horizontal
10690 \begin_layout Standard
10691 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10694 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10698 The length units are listed in Appendix
10699 \begin_inset space ~
10703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10705 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10716 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10721 \begin_inset Index idx
10724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10725 Spaces ! Inter-word
10733 \begin_layout Standard
10734 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10735 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10736 at the ends of sentences.
10737 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10738 automatically takes care about this.
10739 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10740 followed by a period; see section
10741 \begin_inset space ~
10745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10747 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10752 To insert a normal space, select
10754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10755 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10765 arg "space-insert normal"
10771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10775 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10780 \begin_inset Index idx
10783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10792 \begin_layout Standard
10794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10801 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10810 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10811 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10812 inside abbreviations:
10815 \begin_layout Quote
10817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10821 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10824 \begin_layout Standard
10825 or between values and units.
10826 Compare for example this:
10827 \begin_inset Newline newline
10831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10835 \begin_inset Newline newline
10838 10 kg (normal space
10841 \begin_layout Standard
10842 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10845 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10847 \begin_inset space ~
10855 arg "space-insert thin"
10861 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10865 \begin_layout Standard
10866 You can also insert the following space types:
10869 \begin_layout Description
10871 \begin_inset space ~
10875 \begin_inset space ~
10878 space A line with a
10879 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10883 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10887 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10890 negative thin space between the arrows.
10893 \begin_layout Description
10895 \begin_inset space ~
10899 \begin_inset space ~
10902 space A line with a
10903 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10907 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10911 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10914 negative medium space between the arrows.
10917 \begin_layout Description
10919 \begin_inset space ~
10923 \begin_inset space ~
10926 space A line with a
10927 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10931 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10935 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10938 negative thick space between the arrows.
10941 \begin_layout Description
10943 \begin_inset space ~
10947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10951 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10955 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10959 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10963 \begin_inset space ~
10967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10970 em) space between the arrows.
10973 \begin_layout Description
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10987 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10991 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10995 \begin_inset space ~
10999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11002 em) space between the arrows.
11005 \begin_layout Description
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11019 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11023 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11027 \begin_inset space ~
11031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11034 em) space between the arrows.
11037 \begin_layout Description
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11047 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11052 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11059 cm space between the arrows.
11062 \begin_layout Standard
11064 \begin_inset space ~
11068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11070 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11074 lists the different space sizes.
11077 \begin_layout Standard
11078 \begin_inset Float table
11083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11084 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11089 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11093 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset Tabular
11104 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11105 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11106 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11107 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11223 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11382 \begin_inset Index idx
11385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11394 \begin_layout Standard
11395 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11396 feature for adding extra space
11397 in a uniform fashion.
11398 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11399 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11400 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11401 equally between themselves.
11404 \begin_layout Standard
11405 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11408 \begin_layout Quote
11410 This is on the left side
11411 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11414 This is on the right
11417 \begin_layout Quote
11420 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11424 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 \begin_layout Quote
11433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11441 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_layout Standard
11448 That was an example in the
11454 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11462 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11465 is one in a standard paragraph.
11466 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11470 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11473 \begin_layout Standard
11474 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11477 \begin_inset space ~
11482 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11487 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11491 \begin_inset space ~
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11558 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11566 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11570 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11572 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11573 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11577 option in the space dialog.
11585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11589 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11594 \begin_inset Index idx
11597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11606 \begin_layout Standard
11607 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11608 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11611 \begin_layout Standard
11612 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11615 What is correct English?:
11616 \begin_inset Newline newline
11620 \begin_inset Newline newline
11624 \begin_inset space ~
11627 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11628 \begin_inset Newline newline
11632 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
11647 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11658 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11664 \begin_layout Standard
11666 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11671 \begin_inset space ~
11675 \begin_inset space ~
11679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11683 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11686 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11690 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11696 \begin_inset space ~
11700 \begin_inset space ~
11704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11707 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11716 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11717 That is why it is named
11718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11726 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11727 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11731 \begin_layout Subsection
11733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11735 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11740 \begin_inset Index idx
11743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11752 \begin_layout Standard
11753 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11755 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11756 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11758 \begin_inset space ~
11764 There you find the following sizes:
11767 \begin_layout Standard
11780 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11781 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11786 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11788 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11789 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11791 \begin_inset space ~
11797 \begin_inset Index idx
11800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11801 Document ! Settings
11806 for the paragraph separation.
11807 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11818 \begin_layout Standard
11824 \begin_inset Index idx
11827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11833 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11834 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11839 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11840 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11849 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11858 s are described in section
11859 \begin_inset space ~
11863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11865 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11874 If there are several
11878 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11879 You can therefore use
11883 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11886 \begin_layout Standard
11891 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11892 \begin_inset space ~
11896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11898 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11905 \begin_layout Standard
11906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11916 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11917 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11929 \begin_layout Subsection
11930 Paragraph Alignment
11931 \begin_inset Index idx
11934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11935 Paragraph ! Alignment
11943 \begin_layout Standard
11944 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11946 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11949 dialog (toolbar button
11952 arg "layout-paragraph"
11956 There are five possibilities:
11959 \begin_layout Itemize
11967 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11973 \begin_layout Itemize
11981 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11987 \begin_layout Itemize
11995 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12001 \begin_layout Itemize
12009 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12015 \begin_layout Itemize
12023 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12029 \begin_layout Standard
12030 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12031 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12032 the left and right margins.
12033 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12038 This paragraph is right aligned,
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12043 this one is centered,
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12048 this one is left aligned.
12051 \begin_layout Subsection
12053 \begin_inset Index idx
12056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12057 Page breaks ! Forced
12063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12065 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12072 \begin_layout Standard
12073 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12074 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12075 force a page break where you want one.
12076 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12077 is good at page breaking.
12078 Only if you use a lot of
12082 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12083 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12086 \begin_layout Standard
12087 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12088 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12092 have to change the page breaking.
12095 \begin_layout Standard
12096 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12098 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12101 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12103 \begin_inset space ~
12109 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12112 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12114 \begin_inset space ~
12119 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12121 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12122 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12125 \begin_layout Standard
12126 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12127 at the top of a page.
12128 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12130 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12131 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12132 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12136 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12140 to learn more about
12147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12151 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12156 \begin_inset Index idx
12159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12160 Page breaks ! Clear
12168 \begin_layout Standard
12169 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12170 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12171 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12172 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12173 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12176 \begin_layout Standard
12177 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12180 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12182 \begin_inset space ~
12188 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12191 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12197 \begin_inset space ~
12202 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12203 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12206 \begin_layout Subsection
12208 \begin_inset Index idx
12211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12220 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12227 \begin_layout Standard
12228 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12230 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12233 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12235 \begin_inset space ~
12239 \begin_inset space ~
12247 arg "newline-insert newline"
12251 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12253 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12254 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12260 \begin_inset space ~
12268 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12271 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12273 This is useful to avoid
12274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12281 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12284 \begin_layout Standard
12285 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12286 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12288 very good at line breaking.
12289 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12290 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12291 \begin_inset space ~
12295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12297 reference "sec:Quote"
12302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12304 reference "sec:Verse"
12309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12311 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12318 \begin_layout Subsection
12320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12322 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12327 \begin_inset Index idx
12330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12339 \begin_layout Standard
12341 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12359 \begin_inset space ~
12364 you can insert horizontal lines.
12365 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12366 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12367 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12370 \begin_layout Standard
12372 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12383 \begin_layout Section
12384 Characters and Symbols
12387 \begin_layout Standard
12388 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12389 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12390 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12398 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12402 for information on how this is done.
12405 \begin_layout Standard
12406 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12411 dialog via the menu
12413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12414 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12420 \begin_layout Standard
12421 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12429 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12430 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12432 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12440 \begin_layout Section
12441 Fonts and Text Styles
12442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12444 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12451 \begin_layout Subsection
12453 \begin_inset Index idx
12456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12465 \begin_layout Standard
12466 There are two types of fonts:
12469 \begin_layout Description
12471 \begin_inset space ~
12475 \begin_inset Index idx
12478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12484 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12489 characters) in the font.
12490 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12491 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12492 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12493 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12494 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12495 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12496 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12497 \begin_inset Newline newline
12500 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12501 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12502 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12503 sizes than at small ones.
12504 \begin_inset Newline newline
12518 \begin_inset space ~
12526 \begin_layout Description
12528 \begin_inset space ~
12532 \begin_inset Index idx
12535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12541 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12542 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12543 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12544 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12545 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12546 image manipulation program.
12547 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12548 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12549 \begin_inset space ~
12552 pixels high up to 34
12553 \begin_inset space ~
12556 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12557 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12558 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12560 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12561 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12562 \begin_inset Newline newline
12565 Bitmap fonts are named
12568 \begin_inset space ~
12573 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12576 \begin_layout Standard
12577 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12578 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12579 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12580 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12581 use scalable fonts.
12584 \begin_layout Standard
12585 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12590 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12591 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12592 font to emphasize text, you use an
12593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12601 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12603 In \SpecialChar LyX
12604 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12608 \begin_layout Subsection
12611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12613 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12620 \begin_layout Standard
12621 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12622 used its own fonts.
12623 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12624 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12627 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12628 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12629 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12630 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12631 to a word processor.
12632 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12633 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 files are very portable across
12635 different machines.
12636 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12637 has increased a lot
12638 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12641 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12643 \begin_inset space ~
12647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12649 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12654 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12655 code in the document
12656 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12659 \begin_layout Standard
12660 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12661 engines that are also able directly
12662 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12664 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12666 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12668 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12669 that is installed on your system.
12670 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12673 \begin_layout Standard
12674 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12682 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12683 es; so you might have to experiment.
12691 \begin_layout Subsection
12692 Document Font and Font size
12693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12695 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12700 \begin_inset Index idx
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12710 \begin_inset Index idx
12713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 \begin_layout Standard
12723 You can set the document fonts in the
12725 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12729 \begin_inset Index idx
12732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12733 Document ! Settings
12743 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12744 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12747 \begin_inset space ~
12756 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12758 \begin_inset space ~
12761 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12764 \begin_layout Standard
12769 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12770 This requires that you use
12782 as the output format, i.
12783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12787 \begin_inset space \space{}
12790 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12791 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12792 installed (see section
12793 \begin_inset space ~
12797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12799 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12804 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12806 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12807 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12812 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12813 cannot determine the family.
12814 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12815 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12818 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12821 \begin_layout Standard
12822 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12823 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12828 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12834 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12835 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12862 European Computer Modern
12865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12872 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12875 \begin_layout Standard
12884 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12885 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12890 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12893 \begin_inset space ~
12898 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12904 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12905 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12908 \begin_layout Itemize
12912 \begin_inset space ~
12917 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12930 \begin_inset space ~
12935 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12936 community in order to replace
12940 as the default font.
12941 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12942 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12945 \begin_inset space ~
12958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12959 One difference is improved kerning.
12967 \begin_layout Itemize
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12975 \begin_inset space ~
12980 fonts in (the rare) case that
12983 \begin_inset space ~
12988 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13003 Virtual means that it
13004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13015 -glyphs from other fonts.
13016 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13038 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13044 \begin_inset Index idx
13047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13049 -packages ! aeguill
13054 with the document preamble line
13055 \begin_inset Newline newline
13062 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13063 \begin_inset Newline newline
13068 will fix the guillemet problem.
13073 and that accented characters are not
13077 glyph, but built of
13081 characters, the accent and the letter.
13082 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13088 If you search for example for the French word
13089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13096 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13105 and not for the glyph
13106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13110 \begin_inset space ~
13114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13120 \begin_layout Itemize
13121 If you do not like the look of
13129 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13134 \begin_inset space ~
13140 \begin_inset space ~
13150 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13154 serif and typewriter fonts,
13158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13159 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13166 \begin_inset space ~
13175 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13180 \begin_inset space \space{}
13188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13192 \begin_inset space \space{}
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13216 but you can also select your own.
13217 \begin_inset Newline newline
13220 The differences between roman,
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13232 fonts are explained in section
13233 \begin_inset space ~
13237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13239 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13244 \begin_inset Newline newline
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13255 was originally designed for newspapers.
13256 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13257 into the small newspaper columns.
13261 \begin_inset space ~
13266 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13283 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13288 depends on the class you are using.
13289 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13292 \begin_layout Standard
13293 Note that the font size is the
13298 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13299 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13300 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13301 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13304 \begin_inset space ~
13310 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13311 \begin_inset space ~
13315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13317 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13324 \begin_layout Standard
13328 \begin_inset space ~
13333 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13335 \begin_inset space ~
13338 serif or typewriter.
13343 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13353 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13356 \begin_layout Standard
13361 LaTeX font encoding
13363 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13364 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13370 \begin_inset Index idx
13373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13375 -packages ! fontenc
13381 \begin_inset space ~
13385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13387 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13392 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13393 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13400 \begin_layout Standard
13401 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13403 Use Old Style Figures
13407 Use True Small Caps
13410 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13413 Use Old Style Figures
13415 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13417 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13425 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13429 Use True Small Caps
13431 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13432 of scaled capitals.
13433 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13434 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13437 \begin_layout Standard
13442 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13443 a font to display the script characters.
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13448 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13454 \begin_inset Index idx
13457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13464 So this has no effect for the document language
13478 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13482 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13490 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13495 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13496 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13498 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13500 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13503 dialog, see section
13504 \begin_inset space ~
13508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13510 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13522 \begin_layout Subsection
13526 \begin_layout Standard
13527 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13528 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13530 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13531 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13532 choose a math font in the dialog
13534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13538 \begin_inset Index idx
13541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13542 Document ! Settings
13548 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13549 automatically selects a math font.
13550 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13551 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13560 \begin_inset space ~
13566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13571 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13572 document font is available.
13575 \begin_layout Standard
13576 Note that the math font will not be used for
13580 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13586 or by the insertion of the command
13593 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13594 \begin_inset space ~
13598 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13599 while the math characters do not.
13601 \begin_inset space ~
13604 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13607 \begin_inset space ~
13615 \begin_inset space ~
13620 in the document font settings.
13623 \begin_layout Standard
13624 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13625 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13626 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13627 font (in most cases
13628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13634 \begin_inset space ~
13640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13643 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13644 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13652 \begin_inset space ~
13658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13664 \begin_layout Subsection
13665 Using Different Character Styles
13666 \begin_inset Index idx
13669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13676 \begin_inset Index idx
13679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13688 \begin_layout Standard
13689 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13690 automatically changes the character style for certain
13691 paragraph environments.
13693 supports two character styles,
13702 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13706 \begin_layout Standard
13711 style, do one of the following:
13714 \begin_layout Itemize
13715 click on the toolbar button
13724 \begin_layout Itemize
13725 use the key binding
13734 \begin_layout Standard
13735 These commands are all toggles.
13740 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13743 \begin_layout Standard
13744 One typically uses the
13748 style for proper names.
13750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13757 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13765 \begin_layout Standard
13766 A more widely used character style is the
13771 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13778 \begin_layout Itemize
13779 clicking on the toolbar button
13788 \begin_layout Itemize
13789 using the keybindings
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13803 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13805 use a different font.
13808 \begin_layout Standard
13809 We've been using the
13813 style all over the place in this document.
13814 Here's one more example:
13817 \begin_layout Quotation
13820 Do not overuse character styles!
13823 \begin_layout Standard
13824 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13825 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13826 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13827 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13831 \begin_layout Standard
13832 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13840 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13842 \begin_inset space ~
13845 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13851 arg "dialog-show character"
13857 \begin_layout Subsection
13858 Fine-Tuning with the
13863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13865 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13870 \begin_inset Index idx
13873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13883 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13885 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13886 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13887 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13888 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13889 from ordinary dialog.
13892 \begin_layout Standard
13893 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13894 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13895 \begin_inset Newline newline
13898 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13899 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13902 \begin_layout Standard
13903 To use custom character styles, open the
13905 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13907 \begin_inset space ~
13910 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13913 dialog or press the toolbar button
13916 arg "dialog-show character"
13920 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13921 font property that you can choose.
13922 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13925 \begin_inset space ~
13930 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13935 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13936 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13937 environments all at once.
13940 \begin_layout Standard
13941 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13944 \begin_inset space ~
13956 \begin_layout Labeling
13957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13971 The possible options are:
13975 \begin_layout Labeling
13976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13981 This is the Roman font family.
13982 Normally a serif font.
13983 It's also the default family.
13993 \begin_layout Labeling
13994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13998 \begin_inset space ~
14005 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14017 \begin_layout Labeling
14018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14025 This is the Typewriter font family.
14031 arg "font-typewriter"
14040 \begin_layout Labeling
14041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14046 This corresponds to the print weight.
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14057 This is the Medium font series.
14058 It's also the default series.
14061 \begin_layout Labeling
14062 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14069 This is the Bold font series.
14082 \begin_layout Labeling
14083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14088 As the name implies.
14093 \begin_layout Labeling
14094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14099 This is the Upright font shape.
14100 It's also the default shape.
14103 \begin_layout Labeling
14104 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14118 s the Italic font shape
14124 \begin_layout Labeling
14125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14132 This is the Slanted font shape
14134 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14135 , this is different from italic).
14138 \begin_layout Labeling
14139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14143 \begin_inset space ~
14150 This is the Small caps font shape
14157 \begin_layout Labeling
14158 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14163 Alters the text color.
14164 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14168 \begin_inset space ~
14173 , which means that the document default color set in
14175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14176 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14182 \begin_inset space ~
14187 is used, you can choose between
14264 \begin_inset Index idx
14267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14276 \begin_layout Labeling
14277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14282 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14283 the language of the document.
14284 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14285 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14287 \begin_inset Newline newline
14290 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14292 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14293 When using the spell checking (see section
14294 \begin_inset space ~
14298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14300 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14304 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14307 \begin_layout Labeling
14308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14313 Alters the size of the font.
14314 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14315 proportional to the document font size.
14316 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14317 the details, but a general description of what
14323 \begin_layout Labeling
14324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14345 arg "font-size tiny"
14351 \begin_layout Labeling
14352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14373 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14379 \begin_layout Labeling
14380 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14401 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14407 \begin_layout Labeling
14408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14429 arg "font-size small"
14435 \begin_layout Labeling
14436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 It's also the default size.
14454 arg "font-size normal"
14460 \begin_layout Labeling
14461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14482 arg "font-size large"
14488 \begin_layout Labeling
14489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14510 arg "font-size larger"
14516 \begin_layout Labeling
14517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14538 arg "font-size largest"
14544 \begin_layout Labeling
14545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14566 arg "font-size huge"
14572 \begin_layout Labeling
14573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14594 arg "font-size giant"
14600 \begin_layout Labeling
14601 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14606 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14626 arg "font-size increase"
14632 \begin_layout Labeling
14633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14638 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14658 arg "font-size decrease"
14665 \begin_layout Standard
14670 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14671 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14673 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14674 — use those instead.
14675 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14678 \begin_layout Labeling
14679 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14684 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14689 \begin_layout Labeling
14690 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14697 This is text with emphasize on
14700 This might seem like the same as
14704 , but it is actually a bit different.
14710 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14712 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14715 \begin_layout Labeling
14716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14723 This is text with Underbar on.
14729 arg "font-underline"
14735 \begin_inset Newline newline
14740 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14741 when you could not change fonts.
14742 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14743 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14744 because some people
14748 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14751 \begin_layout Labeling
14752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14756 \begin_inset space ~
14763 This is text with Double underbar on.
14769 arg "font-underunderline"
14773 \begin_inset Newline newline
14776 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14777 about double underbar.
14780 \begin_layout Labeling
14781 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14785 \begin_inset space ~
14792 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14798 arg "font-underwave"
14802 \begin_inset Newline newline
14805 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14806 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14809 \begin_layout Labeling
14810 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14817 This is text with Strikeout on.
14823 arg "font-strikeout"
14827 \begin_inset Newline newline
14830 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14831 changed in the meantime.
14834 \begin_layout Labeling
14835 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14842 This is text with Noun on.
14849 , this is a logical attribute.
14850 Normally it's equivalent to
14853 \begin_inset space ~
14862 \begin_layout Standard
14863 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14864 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14871 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14877 arg "dialog-show character"
14880 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14881 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14884 arg "textstyle-apply"
14888 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14892 \begin_layout Standard
14893 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14900 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14901 (suppose you just set the shape to
14902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14920 \begin_inset space ~
14932 \begin_layout Standard
14933 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14941 \begin_inset space ~
14953 \begin_layout Itemize
14959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14966 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14984 \begin_inset Newline newline
14988 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15002 \begin_inset Note Note
15005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15006 For more on phantoms see section
15007 \begin_inset space ~
15011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15013 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15023 \begin_inset Newline newline
15029 \begin_layout Itemize
15034 fonts use characters with serifs.
15035 These are the small
15036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15043 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15044 The following example shows the difference:
15045 \begin_inset Newline newline
15049 \begin_inset Newline newline
15054 text without serifs
15057 \begin_inset Newline newline
15060 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15061 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15068 \begin_layout Itemize
15073 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15074 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15075 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15078 \begin_layout Standard
15079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15086 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15087 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15090 \begin_inset space ~
15095 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15096 the property to be removed.
15097 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15098 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15099 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15117 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15118 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15126 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15130 \begin_inset space ~
15135 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15146 If you, for example, set
15147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15165 \begin_inset space ~
15170 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15179 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15182 \begin_layout Standard
15183 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15184 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15187 \begin_layout Section
15188 Printing and Previewing
15191 \begin_layout Subsection
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15196 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15197 using \SpecialChar LyX
15198 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15199 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15200 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15201 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15203 Additional Features
15208 \begin_layout Standard
15210 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15213 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15214 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15215 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15218 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15219 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15220 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15221 to turn your writing into printable output.
15222 This happens in two stages:
15225 \begin_layout Enumerate
15226 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15227 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15229 a file with the extension,
15230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15244 \begin_layout Enumerate
15245 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15246 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15247 to use the commands in the
15251 file to produce printable output.
15254 \begin_layout Subsection
15255 Output file formats
15256 \begin_inset Index idx
15259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15268 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15276 Simple text (ASCII)
15277 \begin_inset Index idx
15280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15281 File formats ! ASCII
15289 \begin_layout Standard
15290 This file type has the extension
15291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15303 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15307 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15314 \begin_layout Standard
15315 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15317 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15318 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15320 \begin_inset space ~
15326 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15327 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15328 bibliography (section
15329 \begin_inset space ~
15333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15335 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15340 If your document includes such material, use
15342 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15343 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15345 \begin_inset space ~
15349 \begin_inset space ~
15353 \begin_inset space ~
15361 \begin_inset space ~
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15371 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15372 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15378 \begin_inset Index idx
15381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15391 \begin_layout Standard
15392 This file type has the extension
15393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15404 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15407 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15408 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 -Errors or to process it manually
15410 with console commands.
15411 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15412 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15413 's temporary directory whenever you
15414 view or export your document.
15417 \begin_layout Standard
15418 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15419 -file using the menu
15421 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15422 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15426 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15427 export variants are explained in section
15428 \begin_inset space ~
15432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15434 reference "subsec:Export"
15441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15443 \begin_inset Index idx
15446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15455 \begin_layout Standard
15456 This file type has the extension
15457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15477 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15478 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15479 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15483 \begin_layout Standard
15484 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15485 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15486 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15487 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15488 when you view the DVI.
15489 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15492 \begin_layout Standard
15493 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15495 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15496 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15501 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15502 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15504 \begin_inset space ~
15510 The latter option uses the program
15512 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15518 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15521 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15522 font access (see section
15523 \begin_inset space ~
15527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15529 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15534 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15535 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15540 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15542 \begin_inset Index idx
15545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15546 File formats ! PostScript
15554 \begin_layout Standard
15555 This file type has the extension
15556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15568 PostScript was developed by the company
15572 as a printer language.
15573 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15575 PostScript can be seen as a
15576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15579 programming language
15580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15583 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15588 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15595 \begin_inset Index idx
15598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15600 -packages ! pstricks
15610 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15613 \begin_layout Standard
15614 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15618 Encapsulated PostScript
15619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15622 (EPS, file extension
15623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15635 As \SpecialChar LyX
15636 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15637 convert them in the background to EPS.
15638 If, for example, you have 50
15639 \begin_inset space ~
15642 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15644 \begin_inset space ~
15647 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15648 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15650 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15651 EPS to avoid this problem.
15654 \begin_layout Standard
15655 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15657 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15658 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15666 \begin_inset Index idx
15669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15676 \begin_inset Index idx
15679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15688 \begin_layout Standard
15689 This file type has the extension
15690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15706 Portable Document Format
15707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15714 was derived from PostScript.
15715 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15724 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15725 looks exactly the same.
15728 \begin_layout Standard
15729 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15733 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15737 (JPG, file extension
15738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15765 Portable Network Graphics
15766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15769 (PNG, file extension
15770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15782 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15783 converts them in the
15784 background to one of these formats.
15785 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15786 will slow down your workflow.
15787 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15790 \begin_layout Standard
15791 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15793 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15799 \begin_layout Description
15801 \begin_inset space ~
15804 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15808 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15811 \begin_layout Description
15813 \begin_inset space ~
15820 ) This uses the program
15822 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15825 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15828 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15831 is a new engine, derived from
15835 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15836 access (see section
15837 \begin_inset space ~
15841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15843 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15848 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15849 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15854 \begin_layout Description
15856 \begin_inset space ~
15863 ) This uses the program
15868 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15874 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15875 font access (see section
15876 \begin_inset space ~
15880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15882 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15887 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15888 vertically written Japanese.
15891 \begin_layout Description
15893 \begin_inset space ~
15896 (cropped) This is the same as
15899 \begin_inset space ~
15904 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15905 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15906 to generate good-looking
15907 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15910 \begin_layout Description
15912 \begin_inset space ~
15915 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15919 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15923 \begin_layout Description
15925 \begin_inset space ~
15928 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15932 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15933 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15937 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15938 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15941 \begin_layout Standard
15945 \begin_inset space ~
15954 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15955 works without problems.
15956 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15957 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15961 \begin_inset space ~
15969 \begin_inset space ~
15974 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15984 \begin_inset Index idx
15987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15988 FileFormats ! XHTML
15994 \begin_inset Index idx
15997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16006 \begin_layout Standard
16007 This file type has the extension
16008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16020 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16021 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16022 When \SpecialChar LyX
16023 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16024 suitable for the purpose.
16025 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16028 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16031 between different formats, which are described in section
16033 Math Output in XHTML
16038 \begin_inset space ~
16046 \begin_layout Standard
16047 XHTML output remains
16048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16055 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16056 features are supported yet.
16060 and the World Wide Web
16064 Additional Features
16066 manual, for more information.
16069 \begin_layout Standard
16070 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16072 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16073 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16079 \begin_layout Subsection
16081 \begin_inset Index idx
16084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16093 \begin_layout Standard
16094 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16095 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16104 or use the toolbar button
16111 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16112 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16113 \begin_inset space ~
16117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16119 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16123 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16125 \begin_inset space ~
16129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16131 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16136 Further output formats can be selected via
16138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16139 View (Other Formats)
16141 or the toolbar button
16150 \begin_layout Standard
16151 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16152 viewer window using the menu
16154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16160 Update (Other Formats)
16165 \begin_layout Standard
16166 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16169 To have a real output, export your document.
16172 \begin_layout Section
16173 A few Words about Typography
16174 \begin_inset Index idx
16177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16186 \begin_layout Subsection
16187 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16188 \begin_inset Index idx
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 \begin_inset Index idx
16201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16210 \begin_layout Standard
16211 In \SpecialChar LyX
16213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16224 character comes in four lengths: the
16236 , and the minus sign:
16237 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16243 \begin_layout Standard
16244 \begin_inset Tabular
16245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16246 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16247 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16248 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16249 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16250 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16319 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16346 \begin_inset space ~
16349 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16356 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16383 \begin_inset space ~
16386 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16407 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16441 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16447 \begin_layout Standard
16448 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16460 character multiple times in a row.
16461 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16462 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16495 \begin_layout Standard
16496 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16497 math mode and has a length of its own.
16498 Here are some examples:
16501 \begin_layout Enumerate
16502 line- and page-breaks
16503 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16513 \begin_layout Enumerate
16515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16525 \begin_layout Enumerate
16526 Oh — there's a dash.
16527 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16537 \begin_layout Enumerate
16538 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16542 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16552 \begin_layout Subsection
16554 \begin_inset Index idx
16557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16566 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16573 \begin_layout Standard
16574 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16575 but automatically in the output.
16576 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16582 \begin_inset Index idx
16585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16592 following the rules of the document language.
16595 \begin_layout Standard
16597 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16601 font and with unusual constructs, like
16602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16610 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16611 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16612 This is done with the menu
16614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16615 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16617 \begin_inset space ~
16623 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16625 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16629 \begin_layout Standard
16630 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16631 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16642 would then see the hyphen
16643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16650 as a hyphenation possibility.
16651 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16652 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16653 as described in section
16655 Prevent Hyphenation
16660 \begin_inset space ~
16668 \begin_layout Subsection
16670 \begin_inset Index idx
16673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16683 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16686 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16693 \begin_layout Standard
16694 When \SpecialChar LyX
16695 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16696 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16698 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16704 appropriate amount of space.
16705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16708 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16710 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16711 gets after another word.
16714 \begin_layout Standard
16715 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16716 not work in all cases.
16718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16729 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16730 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16733 \begin_layout Standard
16734 Here are some examples of
16738 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16741 \begin_layout Itemize
16746 \begin_layout Itemize
16751 \begin_layout Standard
16752 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16755 \begin_layout Itemize
16757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16761 this is too much space!
16764 \begin_layout Itemize
16769 \begin_layout Standard
16770 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16773 \begin_layout Standard
16774 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16777 \begin_layout Enumerate
16781 \begin_inset space ~
16786 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16787 \begin_inset space ~
16791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16793 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16798 \begin_inset Index idx
16801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16802 Spaces ! inter-word
16810 \begin_layout Enumerate
16814 \begin_inset space ~
16819 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16820 \begin_inset space ~
16824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16826 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16831 \begin_inset Index idx
16834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16843 \begin_layout Enumerate
16847 \begin_inset space ~
16851 \begin_inset space ~
16855 \begin_inset space ~
16862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16864 \begin_inset space ~
16869 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16870 This function is also bound to
16873 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16879 \begin_layout Standard
16880 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16883 \begin_layout Itemize
16885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16889 \begin_inset space \space{}
16892 this is too much space!
16895 \begin_layout Itemize
16896 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16900 \begin_layout Standard
16901 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16902 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16904 will take care of this.
16907 \begin_layout Standard
16908 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16912 \begin_inset space ~
16918 feature described in the section
16920 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16925 Additional Features
16930 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16932 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667523
16934 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669265
16938 \begin_inset Index idx
16941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16943 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669122
16945 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669123
16954 \begin_inset Index idx
16957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16959 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669129
16961 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669204
16968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16994 \begin_layout Standard
16997 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666231
16999 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666233
17003 Specifically, it will
17004 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667043
17006 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667044
17010 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666244
17012 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666245
17015 at the beginning of quoted text, and use a closing
17016 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666248
17018 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666249
17023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17031 The keyboard character,
17035 , generates this automatically.
17038 \begin_layout Standard
17039 You can specify what character the
17044 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669340
17048 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667059
17057 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17061 \begin_inset Index idx
17064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17065 Document ! Settings
17071 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667133
17073 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669342
17079 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667108
17082 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17083 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language)
17087 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666221
17089 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756786
17095 \begin_layout Labeling
17096 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17099 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17110 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666647
17112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17120 \begin_inset space ~
17124 \begin_inset space ~
17128 \begin_inset Quotes els
17132 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17140 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17142 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665592
17146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17150 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665595
17152 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665605
17160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17164 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665637
17166 \begin_inset Quotes els
17170 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17173 quotation marks (as common, e.
17174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17182 \begin_layout Labeling
17183 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17185 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17188 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17192 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17196 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666671
17198 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17202 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17206 \begin_inset space ~
17210 \begin_inset space ~
17214 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17218 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17226 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17227 Use quotes like ”this”
17228 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665692
17230 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17234 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17238 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17242 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17245 quotation marks (as common, e.
17246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17254 \begin_layout Labeling
17255 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17257 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17260 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17264 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17268 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666696
17270 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17274 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17278 \begin_inset space ~
17282 \begin_inset space ~
17286 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17290 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17298 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17300 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17304 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17308 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665749
17310 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17314 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17318 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17322 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17325 quotation marks (as common, e.
17326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17334 \begin_layout Labeling
17335 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17337 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17340 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17344 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17348 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666716
17350 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17354 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17358 \begin_inset space ~
17362 \begin_inset space ~
17366 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17370 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17378 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17380 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17384 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17388 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665786
17390 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17394 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17398 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17402 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17405 quotation marks (as common, e.
17406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17414 \begin_layout Labeling
17415 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17417 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17420 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17424 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17428 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666730
17430 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17434 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17438 \begin_inset space ~
17442 \begin_inset space ~
17446 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17450 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17458 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17460 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17464 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17468 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665816
17470 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17474 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17478 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17482 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17485 quotation marks (as common, e.
17486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17489 g., in Switzerland)
17494 \begin_layout Labeling
17495 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17497 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17500 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17504 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17508 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666747
17510 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17514 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17518 \begin_inset space ~
17522 \begin_inset space ~
17526 \begin_inset Quotes als
17530 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17538 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17540 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17544 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17548 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665851
17550 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17554 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17558 \begin_inset Quotes als
17562 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17565 quotation marks (as common, e.
17566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17572 \begin_layout Labeling
17573 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17575 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666768
17578 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17582 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17586 \begin_inset space ~
17590 \begin_inset space ~
17594 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17598 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17604 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17608 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17612 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17616 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17619 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17622 \begin_layout Labeling
17623 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17625 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666784
17628 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17632 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17636 \begin_inset space ~
17640 \begin_inset space ~
17644 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17648 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17654 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17658 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17662 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17666 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17669 quotation marks (as common, e.
17670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17673 g., in Great Britain)
17676 \begin_layout Labeling
17677 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17679 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666803
17682 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17686 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17690 \begin_inset space ~
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17698 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17702 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17708 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17712 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17716 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17720 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17723 quotation marks (as common, e.
17724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17730 \begin_layout Labeling
17731 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17733 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668207
17736 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17740 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17744 \begin_inset space ~
17748 \begin_inset space ~
17752 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17756 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17762 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17766 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17770 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17774 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17777 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17783 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668407
17784 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17785 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17786 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17787 the inner marks differ).
17797 \begin_layout Labeling
17798 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17800 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666837
17803 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17807 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17811 \begin_inset space ~
17815 \begin_inset space ~
17819 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17823 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17829 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17833 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17837 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17841 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17844 quotation marks (as common, e.
17845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17851 \begin_layout Labeling
17852 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17854 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756796
17857 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17861 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17865 \begin_inset space ~
17869 \begin_inset space ~
17873 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17877 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17883 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17887 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17891 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17895 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17898 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17901 \begin_layout Labeling
17902 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17904 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757086
17905 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17913 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17919 \begin_inset space ~
17923 \begin_inset space ~
17929 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17937 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17941 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17945 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17949 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17953 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17956 quotation marks (as common, e.
17957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17966 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757158
17967 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17968 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17978 \begin_layout Labeling
17979 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17981 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
17982 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17990 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17996 \begin_inset space ~
18000 \begin_inset space ~
18006 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18014 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18018 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18022 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18026 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18030 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18033 quotation marks (as common, e.
18034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18037 g., in North Korea and China)
18041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18043 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18044 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18045 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18055 \begin_layout Standard
18057 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667281
18059 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667281
18063 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666272
18065 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667398
18070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18072 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668512
18073 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18074 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18075 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18083 does not necessarily mean
18084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18092 This is why we call them
18093 \begin_inset Quotes els
18097 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18118 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668702
18119 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18121 \begin_inset Quotes els
18125 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18129 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667343
18131 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667350
18132 can be obtained by means of
18137 arg "quote-insert single"
18141 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668731
18144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18150 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667602
18154 \begin_layout Standard
18156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668992
18157 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18158 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18159 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18160 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18161 If you check the setting
18163 Use dynamic quotation marks
18167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18168 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18171 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18172 they appear in a special color).
18173 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18174 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18179 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18182 \begin_layout Standard
18184 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667904
18185 Individual quotation marks (i.
18186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18189 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18190 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18196 \begin_layout Subsection
18198 \begin_inset Index idx
18201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18202 Typography ! Ligatures
18208 \begin_inset Index idx
18211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18242 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18249 \begin_layout Standard
18250 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18251 print them as single characters.
18252 These groups are known as
18257 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18258 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18260 Here are the standard ligatures:
18263 \begin_layout Itemize
18267 \begin_layout Itemize
18271 \begin_layout Itemize
18275 \begin_layout Itemize
18279 \begin_layout Itemize
18283 \begin_layout Standard
18284 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18287 \begin_layout Standard
18288 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18289 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18297 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18313 To break a ligature, use
18315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18316 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18318 \begin_inset space ~
18325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18336 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18353 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18361 \begin_layout Subsection
18363 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18365 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18367 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18371 \begin_inset Index idx
18374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18384 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18391 \begin_layout Standard
18394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18395 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18399 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18402 \begin_layout Description
18404 The name of the game.
18407 \begin_layout Description
18409 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18413 \begin_layout Description
18415 The \SpecialChar TeX
18416 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18420 \begin_layout Description
18421 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18422 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18426 \begin_layout Standard
18427 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18433 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18441 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18442 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18443 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18444 converges to the number
18445 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18448 : The actual version is
18449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18457 , the previous one was
18458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18469 \begin_layout Subsection
18471 \begin_inset Index idx
18474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18483 \begin_layout Standard
18484 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18485 space between two words.
18486 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18496 for units use the menu
18498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18499 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18501 \begin_inset space ~
18509 arg "space-insert thin"
18515 \begin_layout Standard
18516 Here is an example to show the differences:
18519 \begin_layout Standard
18520 \begin_inset Tabular
18521 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18522 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18523 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18524 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18531 \begin_inset space ~
18535 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18547 space between number and unit
18554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18563 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18575 half space between number and unit
18588 \begin_layout Subsection
18590 \begin_inset Index idx
18593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18602 \begin_layout Standard
18603 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18605 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18606 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18607 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18608 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18609 These bits of text became known as
18620 \begin_layout Standard
18621 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18622 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18623 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18624 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18625 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18626 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18627 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18628 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18629 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18630 \begin_inset Newline newline
18638 \begin_inset Newline newline
18646 \begin_inset Newline newline
18649 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18650 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18651 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18653 \begin_inset space ~
18657 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18659 key "latexcompanion"
18664 \begin_inset space ~
18668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18674 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18675 's page break mechanism.
18678 \begin_layout Chapter
18679 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18682 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18689 \begin_layout Standard
18690 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18693 \begin_inset space ~
18699 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18702 \begin_layout Section
18704 \begin_inset Index idx
18707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18723 \begin_layout Standard
18725 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18728 \begin_layout Description
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18734 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18735 \begin_inset Newline newline
18739 \begin_inset Note Note
18742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18751 \begin_layout Description
18752 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18753 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18754 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18757 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18758 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18760 \begin_inset space ~
18766 \begin_inset Newline newline
18770 \begin_inset Note Comment
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18774 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18783 \begin_layout Description
18785 \begin_inset space ~
18788 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18789 set in the document settings under
18791 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18793 \begin_inset space ~
18799 \begin_inset Newline newline
18803 \begin_inset Newline newline
18807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18816 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18817 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18822 of a comment that appears in the output.
18828 \begin_inset Newline newline
18832 \begin_inset Newline newline
18835 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18838 \begin_layout Standard
18839 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18851 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18854 \begin_layout Section
18856 \begin_inset Index idx
18859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18868 name "sec:Footnotes"
18875 \begin_layout Standard
18877 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18883 or the toolbar button
18886 arg "footnote-insert"
18898 \begin_inset Graphics
18899 filename clipart/footnote.png
18908 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18909 's representation of your footnote.
18919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18938 label, the box will
18942 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18943 Clicking on the box label again will close
18956 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18957 and click on the footnote
18972 \begin_layout Standard
18973 Here is an example footnote:
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18982 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18990 \begin_layout Standard
18991 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18992 position where the footnote box is placed.
18993 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18994 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18995 according to the document class.
18997 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18998 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19004 ey are described in the
19007 \begin_inset space ~
19015 \begin_layout Section
19017 \begin_inset Index idx
19020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19029 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19036 \begin_layout Standard
19037 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19039 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19043 \begin_inset space ~
19048 or the toolbar button
19051 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19077 appearing within your text.
19078 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19079 's representation of your margin
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19089 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19093 \begin_inset Marginal
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19098 This is a marginal note.
19106 \begin_layout Standard
19107 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19108 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19109 pages, right on odd pages.
19112 \begin_layout Standard
19113 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19116 \begin_inset space ~
19124 \begin_inset space ~
19132 \begin_layout Section
19133 Graphics and Images
19134 \begin_inset Index idx
19137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 \begin_inset Index idx
19147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19156 name "sec:Graphics"
19163 \begin_layout Standard
19164 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19165 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19168 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19177 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19180 \begin_layout Standard
19181 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19186 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19187 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19189 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19190 \begin_inset space ~
19194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19196 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19203 \begin_layout Standard
19208 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19209 of the image in the output.
19210 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19214 \begin_inset space ~
19218 \begin_inset space ~
19227 \begin_inset space ~
19231 \begin_inset space ~
19235 \begin_inset space ~
19240 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19241 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19249 \begin_layout Standard
19253 \begin_inset space ~
19257 \begin_inset space ~
19262 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19263 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19265 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19270 \begin_inset space ~
19275 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19276 with the image size is printed.
19279 \begin_layout Standard
19280 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19281 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19283 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19286 \begin_layout Standard
19288 \begin_inset Graphics
19289 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19297 \begin_layout Standard
19298 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19299 the image into a float, see section
19300 \begin_inset space ~
19304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19306 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19313 \begin_layout Subsection
19315 \begin_inset Index idx
19318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19327 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19334 \begin_layout Standard
19335 You can insert images in any known file format.
19336 But as we explained in section
19337 \begin_inset space ~
19341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19343 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19347 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19349 therefore uses the program
19353 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19354 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19355 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19356 \begin_inset space ~
19360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19362 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19369 \begin_layout Standard
19370 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19373 \begin_layout Description
19375 \begin_inset space ~
19378 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19379 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19380 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19384 Graphics Interchange Format
19385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19388 (GIF, file extension
19389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19401 \begin_inset Index idx
19404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19436 Portable Network Graphics
19437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19440 (PNG, file extension
19441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19453 \begin_inset Index idx
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19488 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19492 (JPG, file extension
19493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19517 \begin_inset Index idx
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19551 \begin_layout Description
19553 \begin_inset space ~
19556 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19558 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19559 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19560 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19561 \begin_inset Newline newline
19564 Scalable image formats can be
19565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19568 Scalable Vector Graphics
19569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19572 (SVG, file extension
19573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19585 \begin_inset Index idx
19588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19620 Encapsulated PostScript
19621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19624 (EPS, file extension
19625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19637 \begin_inset Index idx
19640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19672 Portable Document Format
19673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19676 (PDF, file extension
19677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19689 \begin_inset Index idx
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19707 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19708 result will not be scalable.
19709 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19723 \begin_layout Standard
19724 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19731 \begin_layout Subsection
19732 Grouping of Image Settings
19733 \begin_inset Index idx
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19737 Images ! Settings grouping
19745 \begin_layout Standard
19746 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19748 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19749 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19751 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19752 need to manually change each of them.
19756 \begin_layout Standard
19757 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19760 \begin_inset space ~
19764 \begin_inset space ~
19776 \begin_inset space ~
19780 \begin_inset space ~
19786 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19787 and checking the name of the desired group.
19790 \begin_layout Section
19792 \begin_inset Index idx
19795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19811 \begin_layout Standard
19812 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19815 arg "tabular-insert"
19820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19824 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19825 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19826 from the rest of the table.
19827 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19828 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19830 Here is an example table:
19833 \begin_layout Standard
19835 \begin_inset Tabular
19836 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19837 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19838 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19839 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19840 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19841 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 \begin_layout Subsection
20045 \begin_layout Standard
20046 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20049 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20053 This brings up the table dialog.
20054 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20055 cursor is placed currently.
20056 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20057 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20058 done on all of your selection.
20061 \begin_layout Standard
20062 In addition to the table dialog, the
20065 \begin_inset space ~
20070 helps you in setting table properties.
20071 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20074 \begin_layout Standard
20078 \begin_inset space ~
20083 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20084 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20085 current cell respectively.
20086 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20088 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20089 of text, see section
20090 \begin_inset space ~
20094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20096 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20103 \begin_layout Standard
20104 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20105 using the check box
20114 This will merge the cells to
20118 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20119 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20120 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20121 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20122 in the last row without the upper border:
20125 \begin_layout Standard
20127 \begin_inset Tabular
20128 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20129 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20130 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20131 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20132 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20133 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20229 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 \begin_layout Standard
20265 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20266 -arguments for the table.
20267 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20268 explained in the chapter
20275 \begin_inset space ~
20281 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20282 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20283 but are visible in the output.
20286 \begin_layout Standard
20287 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 Most DVI-viewers are
20299 able to display rotations.
20307 \begin_layout Standard
20312 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20317 adds lines for all cell borders.
20320 \begin_layout Subsection
20322 \begin_inset Index idx
20325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20326 Tables ! Multi-page
20332 \begin_inset Index idx
20335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 \begin_layout Standard
20345 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20348 \begin_inset space ~
20352 \begin_inset space ~
20360 \begin_inset space ~
20365 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20366 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20369 \begin_layout Description
20374 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20375 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20376 Except for the first page, if
20379 \begin_inset space ~
20387 \begin_layout Description
20391 \begin_inset space ~
20396 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20397 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20400 \begin_layout Description
20405 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20406 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20407 except for the last page, if
20410 \begin_inset space ~
20418 \begin_layout Description
20422 \begin_inset space ~
20427 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20428 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20431 \begin_layout Description
20432 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20433 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20439 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20442 \begin_inset space ~
20450 \begin_layout Standard
20451 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20452 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20453 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20459 In this context, first means first in this order:
20462 \begin_inset space ~
20474 \begin_inset space ~
20479 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20482 \begin_layout Standard
20484 \begin_inset Tabular
20485 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20486 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20487 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20488 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20489 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20490 <row endfirsthead="true">
20491 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20502 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20521 <row endfirsthead="true">
20522 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <row endhead="true">
20555 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20585 <row endhead="true">
20586 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <row endfoot="true">
20619 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21629 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21640 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21981 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22043 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22136 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22167 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22198 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22384 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22600 <row endlastfoot="true">
22601 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 \begin_layout Subsection
22640 \begin_inset Index idx
22643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22652 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22659 \begin_layout Standard
22660 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22661 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22662 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22663 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22667 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22670 \begin_layout Standard
22671 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22672 for the column in the table dialog.
22673 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22674 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22678 \begin_layout Standard
22680 \begin_inset Tabular
22681 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22682 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22683 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22684 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22685 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22830 This is longer now.
22835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22886 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22887 This is longer now.
22892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22918 \begin_layout Standard
22919 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22920 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22925 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22926 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22932 Selection with the mouse or with
22936 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22937 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22938 the selection from outside the table.
22941 \begin_layout Section
22943 \begin_inset Index idx
22946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22962 \begin_layout Subsection
22966 \begin_layout Standard
22967 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22968 have a fixed location.
22970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22977 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22985 \begin_inset space ~
22990 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22991 too many notes on the current page.
22994 \begin_layout Standard
22995 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22996 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22997 and pages without text.
22998 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22999 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23000 Floats are therefore numbered.
23001 Referencing is described in section
23002 \begin_inset space ~
23006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23008 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23015 \begin_layout Standard
23016 To insert a float, use the menu
23018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23022 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23023 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23025 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23026 \begin_inset Index idx
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23036 paragraph within the float.
23037 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23038 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23039 left-clicking on the box label.
23040 A closed float box looks like this:
23041 \begin_inset Graphics
23042 filename clipart/float.png
23047 – a gray button with a red label.
23050 \begin_layout Standard
23051 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23053 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23056 \begin_layout Subsection
23058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23060 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23065 \begin_inset Index idx
23068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 Floats ! Figure floats
23077 \begin_layout Standard
23079 \begin_inset space ~
23083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23085 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23089 was created using the menu
23091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23092 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23098 arg "float-insert figure"
23102 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23111 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23115 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23116 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23118 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23120 \begin_inset space ~
23128 arg "layout-paragraph"
23134 \begin_layout Standard
23135 \begin_inset Float figure
23140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23142 \begin_inset Graphics
23143 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23153 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23158 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23162 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23175 \begin_layout Standard
23176 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23177 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23188 ) and refer to it using the menu
23190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23196 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23200 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23201 vague references like
23202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23209 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23210 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23220 For more about cross-references, see section
23221 \begin_inset space ~
23225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23227 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23234 \begin_layout Standard
23235 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23236 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23237 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23238 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23239 as described in section
23240 \begin_inset space ~
23244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23246 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23252 \begin_inset space ~
23256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23258 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23262 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23263 You can also set the images one below the other.
23265 \begin_inset space ~
23269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23271 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23278 reference "fig:Platypus"
23282 are the subfigures.
23285 \begin_layout Standard
23286 \begin_inset Float figure
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23296 \begin_inset Float figure
23301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23302 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23307 name "fig:Undefinable"
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23320 \begin_inset Graphics
23321 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23332 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23336 \begin_inset Float figure
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23342 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23347 name "fig:Platypus"
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23360 \begin_inset Graphics
23361 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23373 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23380 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23385 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23389 Two distorted images.
23402 \begin_layout Subsection
23404 \begin_inset Index idx
23407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23408 Floats ! Table floats
23416 \begin_layout Standard
23417 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23420 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23423 or the toolbar button
23426 arg "float-insert table"
23430 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23431 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23432 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23434 \begin_inset space ~
23438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23440 reference "tab:Table-float"
23447 \begin_layout Standard
23448 \begin_inset Float table
23453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23459 name "tab:Table-float"
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 \begin_inset Tabular
23474 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23475 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23476 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23477 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23478 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23605 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23629 \end{array}\right]$
23637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23671 \begin_layout Subsection
23673 \begin_inset Index idx
23676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23685 \begin_layout Standard
23687 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23688 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23689 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23691 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23699 \begin_inset space ~
23707 \begin_layout Section
23709 \begin_inset Index idx
23712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 \begin_layout Standard
23723 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23725 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23726 \begin_inset space \space{}
23733 \begin_layout Standard
23734 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23735 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23741 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23742 and its alignment within the page.
23745 \begin_layout Standard
23747 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23757 height_special "totalheight"
23762 backgroundcolor "none"
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 This is a minipage.
23769 The text is set in an italic style.
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23776 another formatting.
23784 \begin_layout Standard
23785 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23788 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23792 as described in section
23793 \begin_inset space ~
23797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23799 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23804 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23810 \begin_layout Standard
23811 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23821 height_special "totalheight"
23826 backgroundcolor "none"
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23831 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23837 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23841 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23851 height_special "totalheight"
23856 backgroundcolor "none"
23859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23860 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23861 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23869 \begin_layout Standard
23870 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23876 \begin_layout Standard
23877 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23879 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23886 \begin_inset space ~
23894 \begin_layout Chapter
23895 Mathematical Formulas
23896 \begin_inset Index idx
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 \begin_inset Index idx
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23940 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23947 \begin_layout Standard
23948 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23953 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23956 \begin_layout Section
23958 \begin_inset Index idx
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 \begin_layout Standard
23971 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23984 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23986 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23987 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23988 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23996 \begin_layout Standard
23997 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24001 \begin_inset space ~
24006 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24009 \begin_layout Standard
24010 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24011 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24014 \begin_layout Standard
24015 This is a line with an inline formula
24016 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24022 \begin_layout Standard
24023 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24024 paragraph, like this one:
24025 \begin_inset Formula
24032 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24035 \begin_layout Standard
24037 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24039 For example, typing
24040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24053 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24054 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24058 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24061 \begin_inset space ~
24069 \begin_layout Subsection
24070 Navigating in Formulas
24071 \begin_inset Index idx
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 \begin_layout Standard
24084 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24085 achieved with the arrow keys.
24087 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24088 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24093 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24094 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24098 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24102 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24105 \end{array}\right]$
24113 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24118 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24119 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24122 \begin_layout Standard
24127 , printed in this document as
24128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24132 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24139 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24140 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24141 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24146 For example, if you want
24147 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24155 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24165 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24169 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24174 , since in the latter case only the
24177 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24182 will be under the square root sign:
24183 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24189 \begin_layout Standard
24190 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24192 \begin_inset Formula
24194 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24203 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24204 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24207 \begin_layout Subsection
24211 \begin_layout Standard
24212 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24213 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24217 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24218 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24219 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24220 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24221 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24225 \begin_layout Subsection
24226 Exponents and Subscripts
24227 \begin_inset Index idx
24230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24237 \begin_inset Index idx
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24249 \begin_layout Standard
24250 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24253 arg "math-superscript"
24259 arg "math-subscript"
24262 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24264 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24267 , type in a formula
24270 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24280 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24286 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24290 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24296 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24302 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24311 , you have to use an extra
24315 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24316 For example, if you want
24317 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24323 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24329 Subscripts are similar: To get
24330 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24336 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24344 \begin_layout Subsection
24346 \begin_inset Index idx
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24358 \begin_layout Standard
24359 Create a fraction either with the command
24365 or by using the icon
24368 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24374 \begin_inset space ~
24380 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24381 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24382 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24387 To move back up, press
24392 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24393 \begin_inset Formula
24395 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24398 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24406 \begin_layout Subsection
24408 \begin_inset Index idx
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 \begin_layout Standard
24421 Roots can be created using the
24424 \begin_inset space ~
24432 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24438 arg "math-insert \\root"
24460 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24466 always produces a square root.
24469 \begin_layout Subsection
24470 Operators with Limits
24471 \begin_inset Index idx
24474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24481 \begin_inset Index idx
24484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24493 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24500 \begin_layout Standard
24502 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24506 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24509 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24510 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24511 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24512 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24513 The sum operator will automatically place its
24514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24521 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24523 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24527 \begin_inset Formula
24529 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24534 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24538 \begin_layout Standard
24539 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24541 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24542 behind the operator and using the menu
24544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24545 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24547 \begin_inset space ~
24551 \begin_inset space ~
24565 \begin_layout Standard
24566 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24575 \begin_inset Index idx
24578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24585 \begin_inset Formula
24587 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24592 which will place the
24593 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24605 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24606 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24612 \begin_layout Standard
24613 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24620 Have a look at section
24621 \begin_inset space ~
24625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24627 reference "subsec:Functions"
24631 for an explanation of function macros.
24634 \begin_layout Subsection
24636 \begin_inset Index idx
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24648 \begin_layout Standard
24649 Most math symbols can be found in the
24652 \begin_inset space ~
24657 under one of several categories; including
24674 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24678 \begin_layout Standard
24679 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24680 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24681 don't have to use the
24684 \begin_inset space ~
24689 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24691 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24694 \begin_layout Subsection
24696 \begin_inset Index idx
24699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24708 \begin_layout Standard
24709 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24715 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24721 \begin_inset space ~
24729 arg "math-insert \\space"
24733 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24734 For example, the sequence
24739 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24742 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24744 \begin_inset Graphics
24745 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24750 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24751 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24752 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24753 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24754 , because they are negative
24756 Here are two examples:
24759 \begin_layout Standard
24769 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24775 \begin_layout Standard
24785 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24791 \begin_layout Subsection
24793 \begin_inset Index idx
24796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24805 name "subsec:Functions"
24812 \begin_layout Standard
24816 \begin_inset space ~
24821 contains under the button
24824 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24827 a number of function macros, such as
24828 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24832 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24840 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24847 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24848 avoid confusions, because
24849 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24853 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24859 \begin_layout Standard
24860 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24862 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24866 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24872 \begin_layout Standard
24873 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24874 are placed, as described in section
24875 \begin_inset space ~
24879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24881 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24888 \begin_layout Subsection
24890 \begin_inset Index idx
24893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24902 \begin_layout Standard
24903 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24905 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24906 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24907 commands, for example, to enter
24908 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24911 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24912 Our example is entered by typing
24917 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24924 \begin_inset space ~
24928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24930 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24934 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24937 \begin_layout Standard
24938 \begin_inset Float table
24943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24944 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24949 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24953 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 \begin_inset Tabular
24964 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24965 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24966 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24967 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24968 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25052 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25106 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25160 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25214 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25430 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25484 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25529 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25550 \begin_layout Standard
25551 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25554 \begin_inset space ~
25562 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25565 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25569 \begin_layout Section
25570 Brackets and Delimiters
25571 \begin_inset Index idx
25574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25581 \begin_inset Index idx
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25593 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25600 \begin_layout Standard
25601 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25603 For some purposes, using just the keys
25608 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25609 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25610 toolbar delimiter icon
25613 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25617 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25618 \begin_inset Formula
25620 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25628 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25629 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25633 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25636 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25642 \begin_inset Formula
25644 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25652 \begin_layout Standard
25653 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25654 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25658 \begin_layout Standard
25659 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25660 left side and right side.
25661 If you use the option
25664 \begin_inset space ~
25669 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25670 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25672 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25677 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25678 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25681 \begin_layout Standard
25682 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25683 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25684 is to go inside the brackets.
25685 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25690 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25691 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25692 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25696 arg "math-delim ( )"
25702 \begin_layout Section
25703 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25704 \begin_inset Index idx
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25714 \begin_inset Index idx
25717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25724 \begin_inset Index idx
25727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25728 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25736 \begin_layout Standard
25737 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25741 \begin_inset space ~
25749 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25753 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25754 Here is an example:
25755 \begin_inset Formula
25757 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25766 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25767 \begin_inset space ~
25771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25773 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25778 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25779 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25780 This alignment is set in the box
25785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25834 for every column as default.
25835 For example, the sequence
25836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25847 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25848 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25849 corresponds to the relevant column.
25850 The result will look like this:
25851 \begin_inset Formula
25854 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25855 column & has & has\,right\\
25856 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25865 \begin_layout Standard
25866 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25869 arg "newline-insert newline"
25872 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25873 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25875 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25878 or the math toolbar.
25881 \begin_layout Standard
25882 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25883 It can be created with the menu
25885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25886 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25888 \begin_inset space ~
25900 Here is an example:
25901 \begin_inset Formula
25915 \begin_layout Standard
25916 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25919 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25922 arg "newline-insert newline"
25926 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25931 arg "newline-insert newline"
25934 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25942 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25943 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25944 A new row is created by every further entry of
25947 arg "newline-insert newline"
25951 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25952 Here is an example:
25953 \begin_inset Formula
25955 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25956 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25961 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25962 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25963 \begin_inset Formula
25965 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25973 \begin_layout Standard
25974 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25981 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25982 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25985 reference "eq:asquared"
25990 The other types are described in section
25991 \begin_inset space ~
25995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25997 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26004 \begin_layout Section
26005 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26006 \begin_inset Index idx
26009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26010 Math ! Formula numbering
26016 \begin_inset Index idx
26019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26020 Math ! Referencing formulas
26026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26028 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26035 \begin_layout Standard
26036 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26038 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26039 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26041 \begin_inset space ~
26045 \begin_inset space ~
26053 arg "math-number-toggle"
26057 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26058 within parentheses.
26059 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26060 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26061 the document class.
26062 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26063 separated by a dot:
26064 \begin_inset Formula
26074 arg "math-number-toggle"
26077 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26078 You can only number displayed formulas.
26081 \begin_layout Standard
26082 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26084 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26085 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26087 \begin_inset space ~
26091 \begin_inset space ~
26099 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26102 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26103 \begin_inset Formula
26106 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26112 To number all lines use the shortcut
26115 arg "math-number-toggle"
26121 \begin_layout Standard
26122 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26125 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26126 A label is inserted with the menu
26128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26137 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26138 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26139 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26151 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26152 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26153 We inserted in the following example the label
26154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26161 in the second line:
26162 \begin_inset Formula
26164 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26165 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26170 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26171 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26172 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26176 \begin_inset space ~
26184 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26188 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26189 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26190 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26191 as the formula number:
26194 \begin_layout Standard
26195 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26198 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26205 \begin_layout Standard
26206 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26207 's cross-reference box are described in section
26208 \begin_inset space ~
26212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26214 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26219 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26227 \begin_layout Section
26228 User defined math macros
26229 \begin_inset Index idx
26232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26241 \begin_layout Standard
26243 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26244 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26245 Math macros are explained in section
26248 \begin_inset space ~
26260 \begin_layout Section
26264 \begin_layout Subsection
26266 \begin_inset Index idx
26269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26278 \begin_layout Standard
26279 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26280 To set a font in a formula, use the
26283 \begin_inset space ~
26291 arg "math-insert \\font"
26294 , or enter its command, listed in table
26295 \begin_inset space ~
26299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26301 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26308 \begin_layout Standard
26309 \begin_inset Float table
26314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26315 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26320 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26324 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26334 \begin_inset Tabular
26335 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26336 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26337 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26338 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26370 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26397 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26424 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26457 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26484 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26511 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26545 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26606 \begin_layout Standard
26607 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26615 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26631 \begin_layout Standard
26632 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26633 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26638 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26639 space when you need a space in the box.
26640 Here is an example where
26641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26652 denotes the set of numbers:
26653 \begin_inset Formula
26655 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26663 \begin_layout Standard
26664 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26665 You can, for example, put a character in
26674 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26678 \begin_inset Newline newline
26681 So it is better not to use this feature.
26684 \begin_layout Standard
26685 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26686 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26690 \begin_inset Newline newline
26693 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26699 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26700 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26706 \begin_layout Standard
26713 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26716 \begin_layout Standard
26717 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26719 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26720 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26722 \begin_inset space ~
26730 \begin_layout Subsection
26732 \begin_inset Index idx
26735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 \begin_layout Standard
26745 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26747 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26751 \begin_inset space ~
26755 \begin_inset space ~
26763 \begin_inset space ~
26771 arg "math-insert \\font"
26775 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26776 in black instead of blue.
26777 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26778 Here is an example:
26779 \begin_inset Formula
26782 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26783 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26792 \begin_layout Subsection
26794 \begin_inset Index idx
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26806 \begin_layout Standard
26807 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26808 automatically chosen in most situations.
26826 For most characters,
26834 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26835 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26840 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26841 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26842 thinks are appropriate.
26843 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26846 arg "math-insert \\style"
26850 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26851 For example, you can set
26852 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26855 , which is normally in
26864 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26868 The four styles are used in the following example:
26871 \begin_layout Standard
26872 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26876 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26880 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26884 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26890 \begin_layout Standard
26891 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26892 is set in a particular size with the menu
26894 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26896 \begin_inset space ~
26901 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26902 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26903 will be adjusted to correspond.
26904 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26915 \begin_layout Standard
26919 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26925 \begin_layout Section
26926 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26928 \begin_inset Index idx
26931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26938 \begin_inset Index idx
26941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26950 \begin_layout Standard
26952 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26953 that are in common use.
26956 \begin_layout Subsection
26957 Enabling AMS-Support
26960 \begin_layout Standard
26961 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26962 the document by selecting the checkbox
26965 \begin_inset space ~
26969 \begin_inset space ~
26973 \begin_inset space ~
26980 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26984 \begin_inset Index idx
26987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26988 Document ! Settings
26996 \begin_inset space ~
27002 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27003 -errors in formulas,
27004 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27007 \begin_layout Subsection
27009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27011 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27016 \begin_inset Index idx
27019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27020 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27028 \begin_layout Standard
27029 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27030 provides a selection of different formula types.
27032 allows you to choose between
27053 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27054 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27060 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27063 \begin_layout Chapter
27067 \begin_layout Section
27069 \begin_inset Index idx
27072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27081 name "sec:Cross-References"
27088 \begin_layout Standard
27089 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27090 's strengths is cross-references.
27091 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27093 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27094 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27095 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27098 \begin_layout Enumerate
27102 \begin_layout Enumerate
27103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27105 name "enu:Second-item"
27112 \begin_layout Enumerate
27116 \begin_layout Standard
27117 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27122 or by pressing the toolbar button
27129 A gray label box like this:
27130 \begin_inset Graphics
27131 filename clipart/label.png
27135 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27137 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27172 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27173 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27189 \begin_layout Standard
27190 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27195 or the toolbar button
27198 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27202 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27203 \begin_inset Graphics
27204 filename clipart/reference.png
27208 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27210 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27223 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27227 \begin_layout Standard
27228 As an alternative to
27230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27233 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27238 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27239 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27253 \begin_layout Standard
27254 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27255 \begin_inset space ~
27259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27261 reference "enu:Second-item"
27268 \begin_layout Standard
27269 It is recommended to use a protected space
27273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27274 described in section
27275 \begin_inset space ~
27279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27281 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27290 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27291 line breaks between them.
27294 \begin_layout Standard
27295 There are six formats of cross-references:
27298 \begin_layout Description
27299 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27302 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27309 \begin_layout Description
27310 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27311 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27323 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27330 \begin_layout Description
27331 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27332 \begin_inset space ~
27336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27337 LatexCommand pageref
27338 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27345 \begin_layout Description
27347 \begin_inset space ~
27351 \begin_inset space ~
27354 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27356 LatexCommand vpageref
27357 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27362 \begin_inset Newline newline
27365 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27366 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27367 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27368 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27369 it prints “on the next page”.
27370 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27373 \begin_layout Description
27375 \begin_inset space ~
27379 \begin_inset space ~
27383 \begin_inset space ~
27386 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27389 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27394 \begin_inset Newline newline
27397 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27403 ; otherwise it behaves like
27407 \begin_inset space ~
27411 \begin_inset space ~
27420 \begin_layout Description
27422 \begin_inset space ~
27425 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27426 \begin_inset Newline newline
27430 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27438 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27448 \begin_inset Index idx
27451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27453 -packages ! prettyref
27459 \begin_inset Index idx
27462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27464 -packages ! refstyle
27475 \begin_inset Newline newline
27478 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27479 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27482 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27495 is the default and preferred because
27499 supports only English documents.
27500 The format is specified by using the command
27512 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27513 preamble of the document.
27514 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27528 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414614
27532 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414616
27536 \begin_inset Newline newline
27543 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27548 \begin_inset Newline newline
27551 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
27553 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27555 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27560 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414624
27562 \begin_inset Newline newline
27565 The `Plural' and `Capitalized' options will be available with formatted
27566 references only if you are using the
27571 See its documentation, again, for more information.
27574 \begin_layout Description
27576 \begin_inset space ~
27579 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27581 LatexCommand nameref
27582 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27587 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414460
27591 \begin_layout Description
27593 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414501
27595 \begin_inset space ~
27598 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27599 label for the reference.
27600 This allows for customization, using ERT, if you want to issue a command
27601 that LyX does not support.
27602 \change_deleted 424524441 1483414539
27606 \begin_layout Standard
27607 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
27608 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27610 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27614 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27618 \begin_layout Standard
27619 You can only use the style
27623 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27627 is always possible.
27630 \begin_layout Standard
27631 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27632 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27634 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27635 \begin_inset space ~
27639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27641 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27648 \begin_layout Standard
27649 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27653 \begin_inset space ~
27657 \begin_inset space ~
27662 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27663 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27666 \begin_inset space ~
27671 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27672 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27675 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27681 \begin_layout Standard
27682 You can change labels at any time.
27683 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27684 do not need to think about this.
27687 \begin_layout Standard
27688 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27690 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27694 \begin_layout Standard
27695 References are described in detail in the section
27696 \begin_inset space ~
27706 \begin_inset space ~
27712 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27716 \begin_layout Standard
27718 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27719 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27724 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27729 It is recommended to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27735 \begin_inset Index idx
27738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27740 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27742 -packages ! refstyle
27752 \begin_inset Index idx
27755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27757 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27759 -packages ! prettyref
27764 does not know all of \SpecialChar LyX
27765 's possible label shortcuts
27769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27771 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27779 is for example \SpecialChar LyX
27780 's shortcut for labels in figure captions.
27785 and is not internationalized.
27795 \begin_layout Section
27796 Table of Contents and other Listings
27797 \begin_inset Index idx
27800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27807 \begin_inset Index idx
27810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27811 Navigating ! Outline
27817 \begin_inset Index idx
27820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27836 \begin_layout Subsection
27838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27840 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27847 \begin_layout Standard
27848 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27851 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27853 \begin_inset space ~
27857 \begin_inset space ~
27863 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27865 If you click on it, the
27869 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27870 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27871 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27873 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27875 \begin_inset space ~
27880 that is described in section
27881 \begin_inset space ~
27885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27887 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27894 \begin_layout Standard
27895 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27896 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27898 \begin_inset space ~
27902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27904 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27908 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27910 \begin_inset space ~
27914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27916 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27920 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27922 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27925 \begin_layout Subsection
27926 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27929 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27936 \begin_layout Standard
27937 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27939 You can insert them via the
27941 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27945 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27948 \begin_layout Section
27949 URLs and Hyperlinks
27950 \begin_inset Index idx
27953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27960 \begin_inset Index idx
27963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27972 \begin_layout Subsection
27974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27983 \begin_layout Standard
27984 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27986 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27992 \begin_layout Standard
27993 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27995 \begin_inset Flex URL
27998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28008 \begin_layout Standard
28009 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28015 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28019 \begin_layout Standard
28020 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28028 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28037 \begin_layout Subsection
28039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28041 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28048 \begin_layout Standard
28049 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28051 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28054 or with the toolbar button
28061 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28070 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28071 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28072 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28074 name "LyX's homepage"
28075 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28079 , an Email address like this:
28080 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28082 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28083 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28088 , or a link to a file.
28091 \begin_layout Standard
28092 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28105 to the link target.
28108 \begin_layout Standard
28109 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28110 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28111 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28112 the text style dialog.
28113 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28117 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28119 name "LyX's homepage"
28120 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28127 \begin_layout Standard
28128 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28132 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28134 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28135 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28139 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28141 \begin_inset Newline newline
28149 \begin_inset Newline newline
28156 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28159 \begin_layout Section
28161 \begin_inset Index idx
28164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28173 name "sec:Appendices"
28180 \begin_layout Standard
28181 Appendices are created with the menu
28183 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28185 \begin_inset space ~
28189 \begin_inset space ~
28195 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28196 as the appendix part of the book.
28197 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28200 \begin_layout Standard
28201 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28202 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28203 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28204 and the subsection number.
28205 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28209 \begin_layout Standard
28211 \begin_inset space ~
28215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28217 reference "chap:Credits"
28222 \begin_inset space ~
28226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28228 reference "subsec:Export"
28235 \begin_layout Section
28237 \begin_inset Index idx
28240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28249 name "sec:Bibliography"
28256 \begin_layout Standard
28257 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28259 You can include a bibliography database,
28263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28264 Known under the name
28265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28268 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28278 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
28279 manually, using the paragraph environment
28283 , which was described in section
28284 \begin_inset space ~
28288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28290 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28295 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28296 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
28300 use a bibliography database.
28303 \begin_layout Subsection
28304 The Bibliography Environment
28307 \begin_layout Standard
28312 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28314 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28323 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28325 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28335 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28338 \begin_layout Standard
28339 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28344 or the toolbar button
28347 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28351 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28352 containing the available citations.
28353 Select one or more keys from the list and
28363 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28364 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28368 \begin_layout Standard
28369 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28370 entry with surrounding brackets.
28375 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28376 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28388 \begin_layout Standard
28392 Companion Second Edition
28395 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28397 key "latexcompanion"
28404 \begin_layout Standard
28405 The \SpecialChar LyX
28406 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28407 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28416 \begin_layout Standard
28417 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28420 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28422 \begin_inset space ~
28430 arg "layout-paragraph"
28434 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28437 \begin_layout Subsection
28438 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28440 \begin_inset Index idx
28443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28444 Bibliography ! Databases
28450 \begin_inset Index idx
28453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28454 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28463 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28470 \begin_layout Standard
28471 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
28476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28477 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28479 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28480 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28485 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28487 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28488 your working field in a database.
28489 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28490 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28491 list for that document.
28492 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28496 \begin_layout Standard
28497 The database is a text file with the file extension
28498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28509 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28510 The format is explained in
28511 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28517 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28519 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28521 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28526 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28527 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28528 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28530 \begin_inset Flex URL
28533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28535 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28543 \begin_layout Standard
28544 To use a database, use the menu
28546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28551 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28553 \begin_inset space ~
28559 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28560 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28567 Add bibliography to TOC
28569 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28574 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28575 in the document or just the cited references.
28578 \begin_layout Standard
28579 The style file is a text file with the file extension
28580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28591 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28592 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28593 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28594 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28596 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28602 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28603 \begin_inset Newline newline
28607 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28609 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28621 \begin_layout Standard
28622 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28625 \begin_layout Standard
28626 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
28627 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28629 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
28636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28637 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28642 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28643 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28644 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28648 The following variants are possible:
28651 \begin_layout Description
28652 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
28653 with other bibliography packages (e.
28654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28658 \begin_inset space \space{}
28665 ), only with the package
28669 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
28673 \begin_layout Description
28674 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
28675 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
28676 with all bibliography packages, except
28681 \begin_layout Description
28682 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
28687 , works with all bibliography packages
28690 \begin_layout Standard
28691 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28692 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
28694 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
28697 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28701 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28710 \begin_layout Standard
28711 When you select the option
28713 Sectioned bibliography
28717 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28718 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28721 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
28722 This and other options are explained in detail in section
28724 Customizing Bibliographies
28728 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28733 Additional Features
28738 \begin_layout Standard
28739 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
28740 the two methods of creating them.
28741 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28742 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28743 We used the style file
28747 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
28750 \begin_layout Subsection
28752 \begin_inset Index idx
28755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28756 Bibliography ! Citation format
28764 \begin_layout Standard
28765 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
28766 For this feature you need to enable the option
28772 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28776 \begin_inset Index idx
28779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28780 Document ! Settings
28790 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
28791 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28792 style files as explained in
28793 the previous section.
28796 \begin_layout Standard
28797 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
28798 the citation reference window.
28799 Here is an example where the text
28800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28804 \begin_inset space ~
28808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28811 appears after the reference:
28814 \begin_layout Standard
28816 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28819 key "latexcompanion"
28826 \begin_layout Section
28828 \begin_inset Index idx
28831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28847 \begin_layout Standard
28848 An index entry is created if you use the menu
28850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28852 \begin_inset space ~
28857 or the toolbar button
28864 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
28865 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
28866 by \SpecialChar LyX
28867 as the index entry.
28870 \begin_layout Standard
28871 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
28873 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28874 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28876 \begin_inset space ~
28882 A light blue box labeled
28883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28894 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
28895 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
28899 \begin_layout Standard
28900 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
28901 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
28902 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
28903 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28905 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28907 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
28914 \begin_layout Subsection
28915 Grouping Index Entries
28916 \begin_inset Index idx
28919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28928 \begin_layout Standard
28929 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
28931 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
28932 lists under the entry
28933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28941 First we create the entry
28942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28950 \begin_inset space ~
28954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28956 reference "subsec:Lists"
28961 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
28962 \begin_inset space ~
28966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28968 reference "sec:Itemize"
28972 , we insert the command
28975 \begin_layout Standard
28981 \begin_layout Standard
28985 \begin_layout Standard
28991 \begin_layout Standard
28992 for the enumerated list in section
28993 \begin_inset space ~
28997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28999 reference "sec:Enumerate"
29006 \begin_layout Standard
29007 The exclamation mark
29008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29015 marks the grouping levels.
29016 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
29017 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
29018 If we don't have an index entry for
29019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29026 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
29029 \begin_layout Subsection
29031 \begin_inset Index idx
29034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29035 Index ! Page ranges
29043 \begin_layout Standard
29044 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
29046 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
29047 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
29048 an index entry in section
29049 \begin_inset space ~
29053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29055 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
29062 \begin_layout Standard
29065 Paragraph environments|(
29068 \begin_layout Standard
29069 and another entry at the end of section
29070 \begin_inset space ~
29074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29076 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
29083 \begin_layout Standard
29086 Paragraph environments|)
29089 \begin_layout Standard
29091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29114 respectively start and end the index range.
29115 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
29116 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
29117 the pages of the indexed document parts.
29118 An example is the index entry
29119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29122 Document ! Settings
29123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29129 \begin_layout Subsection
29131 \begin_inset Index idx
29134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29135 Index ! Cross referencing
29143 \begin_layout Standard
29144 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
29145 We referred for example in the index entry
29146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29154 \begin_inset space ~
29158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29160 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
29164 ) to the index entry
29165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29172 in the same section using the entry
29175 \begin_layout Standard
29178 GIF|see{Image formats}
29181 \begin_layout Standard
29182 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
29184 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
29185 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
29188 \begin_layout Subsection
29190 \begin_inset Index idx
29193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29194 Index ! Entry order
29202 \begin_layout Standard
29203 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
29204 follow the rules for the index order.
29205 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
29210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29211 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
29213 \begin_inset space ~
29217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29219 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29228 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
29229 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
29230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29254 \begin_inset Index idx
29257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29258 Dummy entries ! maïs
29264 \begin_inset Index idx
29267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29268 Dummy entries ! maître
29274 \begin_inset Index idx
29277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29278 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
29283 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
29284 maïs, maison, maître.
29285 To achieve this, we use the command
29288 \begin_layout Standard
29291 previous entry@current entry
29294 \begin_layout Standard
29295 In our case we want to have
29296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29311 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
29314 \begin_layout Standard
29320 \begin_layout Standard
29321 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
29322 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
29324 See the next subsection for an example.
29327 \begin_layout Standard
29328 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29334 \begin_layout Standard
29335 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
29340 to generate the index (see section
29341 \begin_inset space ~
29345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29347 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29356 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29357 -package aeguill in section
29358 \begin_inset space ~
29362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29364 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
29368 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
29369 -packages although all these index
29370 commands start with
29371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29384 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
29389 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
29392 \begin_layout Standard
29404 \begin_layout Standard
29416 \begin_layout Subsection
29418 \begin_inset Index idx
29421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29422 Index ! Entry layout
29430 \begin_layout Standard
29431 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
29432 \begin_inset Index idx
29435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29438 This is an italic dummy entry
29443 You can also format the page number using the character
29444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29451 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29452 -command without a backslash.
29453 We can write for example
29456 \begin_layout Standard
29459 italic page number:|textit
29462 \begin_layout Standard
29463 to get the page number in italic.
29464 \begin_inset Index idx
29467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29468 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
29473 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
29474 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
29476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29492 \begin_inset space ~
29498 Have a look at section
29499 \begin_inset space ~
29503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29505 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29509 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29513 \begin_layout Standard
29514 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29522 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
29526 to generate the index, see section
29527 \begin_inset space ~
29531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29533 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29542 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
29547 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
29548 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29551 key "latexcompanion"
29563 \begin_layout Standard
29564 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
29566 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
29567 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
29568 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
29569 If so, put the following in the preamble
29572 \begin_layout Standard
29584 \begin_layout Standard
29588 \begin_layout Standard
29594 \begin_layout Standard
29595 in the index entry.
29596 \begin_inset Index idx
29599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29600 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
29605 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
29606 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
29607 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
29610 \begin_layout Standard
29611 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
29612 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
29613 a bold font for all index entries.
29614 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
29626 documentation for details,
29627 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29629 key "makeindex,xindy"
29636 \begin_layout Subsection
29638 \begin_inset Index idx
29641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29650 name "subsec:Index-Program"
29657 \begin_layout Standard
29658 If the index generation program
29662 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
29663 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
29667 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29668 distribution, is used.
29672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29677 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
29678 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
29679 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
29680 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
29681 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
29691 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
29693 dialog, see section
29694 \begin_inset space ~
29698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29700 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29705 The available options are listed and explained in
29706 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29708 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
29713 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
29717 \begin_layout Standard
29718 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
29719 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
29722 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29723 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29727 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
29728 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
29731 \begin_layout Subsection
29735 \begin_layout Standard
29736 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
29737 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
29738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29745 next to the standard index.
29747 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
29748 that add this feature.
29755 \begin_inset Index idx
29758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29760 -packages ! splitidx
29765 package to generate multiple indexes.
29766 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
29771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29772 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
29774 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29781 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29782 style, but it also includes
29783 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
29784 Please consult the package's manual for details.
29792 \begin_layout Standard
29793 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
29794 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
29796 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29797 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29800 and select the option
29802 Use multiple Indexes
29809 already contains the standard index
29810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29818 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
29819 also appear as a heading) to the
29823 input field and press the
29828 The new index now also appears in the list.
29829 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
29830 label color to the new index.
29833 \begin_layout Standard
29834 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
29837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29844 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
29845 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
29846 are additional features:
29849 \begin_layout Itemize
29850 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
29851 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
29854 \begin_layout Itemize
29855 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
29856 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
29857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29864 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
29865 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
29866 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
29867 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
29870 \begin_layout Section
29871 Nomenclature/Glossary
29872 \begin_inset Index idx
29875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29882 \begin_inset Index idx
29885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29916 name "sec:Nomenclature"
29923 \begin_layout Standard
29924 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
29925 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
29926 called nomenclature or glossary.
29929 \begin_layout Standard
29930 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29937 \begin_inset Index idx
29940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29942 -packages ! nomencl
29948 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
29950 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29956 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29960 \begin_layout Standard
29961 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
29962 and then use the menu
29964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29970 \begin_inset space ~
29975 or the toolbar button
29978 arg "nomencl-insert"
29983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29994 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
29997 \begin_layout Standard
29998 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
29999 The first is the term or
30003 that you wish to define.
30008 of the term or symbol.
30011 \begin_layout Standard
30012 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30020 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
30021 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
30029 \begin_layout Subsection
30030 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
30031 \begin_inset Index idx
30034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30035 Nomenclature ! Layout
30043 \begin_layout Standard
30044 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
30048 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
30051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30055 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30063 \begin_inset Newline newline
30071 \begin_inset Newline newline
30077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30084 character starts/ends the formula.
30085 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30086 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
30088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30098 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
30108 \begin_layout Standard
30109 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30110 -syntax is given in section
30111 \begin_inset space ~
30115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30117 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30124 \begin_layout Standard
30128 \begin_inset space ~
30133 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
30135 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
30136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30140 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30147 in this document is:
30148 \begin_inset Newline newline
30153 dummy entry for the character
30158 \begin_inset Newline newline
30170 \begin_inset space ~
30180 font use the command
30209 \begin_layout Standard
30210 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
30211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30215 \begin_inset space \space{}
30219 \begin_inset Newline newline
30235 \begin_inset Newline newline
30238 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
30239 This command will make the font of all symbols
30246 \begin_inset space ~
30254 \begin_layout Standard
30255 If the characters |
30256 \begin_inset space \space{}
30260 \begin_inset space \space{}
30264 \begin_inset space \space{}
30268 \begin_inset space \space{}
30272 \begin_inset space \space{}
30275 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
30276 a quote character in front of them.
30277 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30278 LatexCommand nomenclature
30279 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
30280 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
30287 \begin_layout Subsection
30288 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
30289 \begin_inset Index idx
30292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30293 Nomenclature ! Sort order
30301 \begin_layout Standard
30302 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30303 -code of the symbol
30305 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
30307 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
30310 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30311 LatexCommand nomenclature
30313 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
30320 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30324 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30325 LatexCommand nomenclature
30328 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
30333 They will be sorted by
30334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30360 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30363 will be sorted before the
30367 since the character
30368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30375 is considered in sorting.
30378 \begin_layout Standard
30379 To control the sort order, you can edit the
30382 \begin_inset space ~
30387 field of the nomenclature dialog.
30388 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
30390 For the example given, you can insert
30394 in this field for the
30395 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30402 will be located before
30403 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30409 \begin_layout Standard
30410 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
30415 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30424 \begin_layout Subsection
30425 Nomenclature Options
30426 \begin_inset Index idx
30429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30430 Nomenclature ! Options
30438 \begin_layout Standard
30443 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
30444 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
30447 \begin_layout Description
30448 refeq Appends the phrase
30449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30464 to every nomenclature entry, where
30470 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
30473 \begin_layout Description
30474 refpage Appends the phrase
30475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30490 to every nomenclature entry, where
30496 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
30499 \begin_layout Description
30500 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
30503 \begin_layout Standard
30504 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
30505 class options list in the
30507 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30511 In this document the options
30518 \begin_layout Standard
30519 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30525 \begin_layout Standard
30526 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
30527 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
30532 field in the nomenclature dialog:
30535 \begin_layout Description
30545 \begin_layout Description
30548 nomrefpage Like the
30555 \begin_layout Description
30558 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
30567 \begin_layout Description
30571 \begin_inset space ~
30577 \begin_inset space ~
30582 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
30585 \begin_layout Standard
30587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30594 are automatically translated for some document languages.
30595 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30599 \begin_layout Standard
30607 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
30610 \begin_inset Newline newline
30617 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
30622 \begin_inset Newline newline
30626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30641 by their translation.
30644 \begin_layout Subsection
30645 Printing the Nomenclature
30646 \begin_inset Index idx
30649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30650 Nomenclature ! Printing
30658 \begin_layout Standard
30659 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
30661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30662 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30678 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
30679 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
30680 You can choose between these settings:
30683 \begin_layout Description
30684 Default a space of 1
30685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30691 \begin_layout Description
30693 \begin_inset space ~
30697 \begin_inset space ~
30700 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
30703 \begin_layout Description
30704 Custom custom space
30707 \begin_layout Standard
30708 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
30709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30717 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
30725 For example, in order to change the name to
30729 , add the following line to the preamble:
30732 \begin_layout Standard
30740 nomname}{List of Symbols}
30743 \begin_layout Subsection
30744 Nomenclature Program
30745 \begin_inset Index idx
30748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30749 Nomenclature ! Program
30755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30757 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
30764 \begin_layout Standard
30770 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30771 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
30773 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
30778 by adding options, see section
30779 \begin_inset space ~
30783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30785 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30790 The available options are listed and explained in
30791 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30793 key "nomencl,makeindex"
30800 \begin_layout Section
30802 \begin_inset Index idx
30805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30812 \begin_inset Index idx
30815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30816 Document ! Branches
30822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30824 name "sec:Branches"
30831 \begin_layout Standard
30832 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
30833 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
30834 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
30835 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
30838 \begin_layout Standard
30839 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
30840 allows you to put text into branches.
30841 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
30842 To create a branch, either select the menu
30844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30845 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
30848 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
30850 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30857 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
30858 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
30859 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
30860 and whether the name of the branch should
30861 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
30862 (see below for an example).
30863 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
30864 to the name of the other) and to add
30865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30877 \begin_inset space ~
30880 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
30881 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
30884 \begin_layout Standard
30885 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
30886 These boxes are inserted via the menu
30888 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30891 where you can choose a branch.
30892 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
30896 \begin_layout Standard
30897 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
30898 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
30901 \begin_layout Standard
30902 \begin_inset Branch Question
30906 \begin_layout Standard
30907 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30916 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30920 \begin_layout Standard
30921 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
30929 \begin_layout Standard
30936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30937 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30940 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
30941 Consider for example a file
30942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30949 which has the above branches.
30951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30958 is active, the PDF export file would be called
30959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30982 branch were inactive,
30983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30998 branch was active, likewise
30999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31014 branch was active, and
31015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31018 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
31019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31022 if both branches were active.
31023 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
31024 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
31028 \begin_layout Standard
31030 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
31031 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
31032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31039 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
31045 \begin_inset Branch Question
31049 \begin_layout Standard
31051 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
31052 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
31060 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
31061 To control whether a particular inset is
31062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31069 , right-click on the inset button and choose
31070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31076 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
31078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31082 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
31086 \begin_layout Standard
31087 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31093 \begin_layout Standard
31094 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
31095 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
31096 definitions for each branch.
31097 For example you can define for the question branch
31101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31102 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31103 -syntax, see section
31104 \begin_inset space ~
31108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31110 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31122 \begin_layout Standard
31132 \begin_layout Standard
31142 \begin_layout Standard
31143 and for the answer branch
31146 \begin_layout Standard
31156 \begin_layout Standard
31166 \begin_layout Standard
31167 \begin_inset Branch Question
31171 \begin_layout Standard
31175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31203 \begin_layout Standard
31204 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31208 \begin_layout Standard
31212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31240 \begin_layout Standard
31241 Now it is possible to use the
31245 question{\SpecialChar ldots
31252 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
31255 commands to obtain conditional output.
31256 Here is an example formula where only the
31263 \begin_inset Formula
31265 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
31273 \begin_layout Standard
31274 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
31282 \begin_layout Standard
31283 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
31285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31289 \begin_inset space \space{}
31292 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
31294 For this advanced usage, see the
31300 Flex insets and InsetLayout
31305 \begin_layout Section
31307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31309 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
31314 \begin_inset Index idx
31317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31326 \begin_layout Standard
31329 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31330 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31333 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
31335 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31341 \begin_inset Index idx
31344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31346 -packages ! hyperref
31351 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
31352 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
31353 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
31354 part of the document.
31358 \begin_layout Standard
31359 The header information in the dialog tab
31363 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
31364 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
31365 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
31366 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
31370 \begin_inset space ~
31374 \begin_inset space ~
31379 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
31380 tries to extract the header information from your document title
31381 and author entries.
31385 \begin_inset space ~
31389 \begin_inset space ~
31393 \begin_inset space ~
31398 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
31401 \begin_layout Standard
31402 You can specify in the dialog tab
31406 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
31411 \begin_inset space ~
31415 \begin_inset space ~
31419 \begin_inset space ~
31424 option allows long links to be split;
31427 \begin_inset space ~
31431 \begin_inset space ~
31435 \begin_inset space ~
31443 \begin_inset space ~
31448 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
31451 \begin_inset space ~
31456 colors the different links.
31457 The default colors are:
31460 \begin_layout Labeling
31461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
31466 for hyperlinks and URLs
31469 \begin_layout Labeling
31470 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
31478 \begin_layout Labeling
31479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
31487 \begin_layout Standard
31488 but you can change these in the field
31493 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
31496 \begin_layout Standard
31499 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
31502 \begin_layout Standard
31507 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
31508 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
31509 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
31512 \begin_layout Standard
31517 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
31518 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
31519 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
31529 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
31530 when opening the PDF.
31532 \begin_inset space ~
31535 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
31536 \begin_inset space ~
31539 1 will only display the sections.
31542 \begin_layout Standard
31543 PDF properties are also used in this document.
31544 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
31550 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
31551 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31560 \begin_layout Section
31562 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31566 name "sec:TeX-Code"
31573 \begin_layout Subsection
31576 \begin_inset Index idx
31579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31589 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
31596 \begin_layout Standard
31597 As \SpecialChar LyX
31598 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
31599 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
31600 commands and constructs,
31603 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
31604 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
31605 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
31606 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31607 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
31608 cannot support all packages and
31612 \begin_layout Standard
31613 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
31614 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
31615 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
31619 Code box is created by the menu
31621 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31623 \begin_inset space ~
31628 or by the toolbar button
31641 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
31649 \begin_layout Standard
31650 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
31652 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
31654 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
31655 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31662 , you can write the command part
31668 in a \SpecialChar TeX
31669 Code box before the word and the closing brace
31673 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
31674 Code box behind the word.
31675 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
31676 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
31680 \begin_layout Standard
31681 \begin_inset Graphics
31682 filename clipart/ERT.png
31690 \begin_layout Standard
31694 \begin_layout Standard
31695 This is a line with a
31699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31722 \begin_layout Standard
31723 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31731 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31732 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
31733 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
31734 know that the command is finished.
31742 \begin_layout Subsection
31743 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31745 \begin_inset Argument 1
31748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31749 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31756 \begin_inset Index idx
31759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31769 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31776 \begin_layout Standard
31777 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
31778 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31779 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
31780 uses in the background.
31781 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
31782 is based on commands, you can
31783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31791 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
31792 any time if you know the right commands.
31793 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
31794 is the end of the day.
31795 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
31796 all caption labels bold.
31797 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
31799 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
31803 \begin_layout Standard
31804 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
31806 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31808 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31811 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31820 \begin_layout Standard
31821 As result you find that the package
31826 \begin_inset Index idx
31829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31831 -packages ! caption
31837 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
31839 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31842 \SpecialChar menuseparator
31846 \begin_inset space ~
31854 \begin_layout Standard
31859 usepackage[options]{package name}
31862 \begin_layout Standard
31863 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
31864 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
31865 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
31866 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
31869 \begin_layout Standard
31870 In your case the package name is
31875 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
31880 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
31881 So you add the command
31884 \begin_layout Standard
31889 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
31892 \begin_layout Standard
31893 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
31897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31898 For more commands provided by the
31902 package, have a look at its documentation,
31903 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31917 \begin_layout Standard
31918 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
31920 For example if you use a
31924 class, you don't need the package
31928 , you can instead write
31931 \begin_layout Standard
31936 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
31941 \begin_layout Standard
31942 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
31943 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
31944 documentation of the document class you want to use.
31951 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
31954 \begin_layout Standard
31955 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
31956 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
31958 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31959 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
31960 Code box as described in the previous
31964 \begin_layout Standard
31965 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31966 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31969 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31971 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
31978 \begin_layout Standard
31979 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
31985 \begin_layout Standard
31989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31999 \begin_inset Note Note
32002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32003 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
32011 \begin_layout Left Header
32012 \begin_inset Argument 1
32015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32035 \begin_inset Note Note
32038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32039 defines the header line as described below
32047 \begin_layout Center Header
32048 \begin_inset Argument 1
32051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32060 \begin_layout Right Header
32061 \begin_inset Argument 1
32064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32085 \begin_layout Left Footer
32086 \begin_inset Argument 1
32089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32110 \begin_layout Center Footer
32111 \begin_inset Argument 1
32114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32126 \begin_inset Newline newline
32130 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
32136 \begin_layout Right Footer
32137 \begin_inset Argument 1
32140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32162 \begin_layout Section
32163 Customized Page Headers and Footers
32164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32166 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
32171 \begin_inset Index idx
32174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32175 Document ! Header/Footer line
32181 \begin_inset Index idx
32184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32193 \begin_layout Standard
32194 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
32198 \begin_inset space ~
32209 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32215 \begin_inset space ~
32221 As a second step add in the menu
32223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32224 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32233 Custom Header/Footerlines
32236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32240 This module offers the following 6
32241 \begin_inset space ~
32247 \begin_layout Description
32249 \begin_inset space ~
32253 \begin_inset space ~
32257 \begin_inset space ~
32261 \begin_inset space ~
32265 \begin_inset space ~
32271 \begin_layout Description
32273 \begin_inset space ~
32277 \begin_inset space ~
32281 \begin_inset space ~
32285 \begin_inset space ~
32289 \begin_inset space ~
32295 \begin_layout Standard
32296 for the different positions in the header/footer.
32297 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
32300 \begin_layout Standard
32301 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
32302 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
32304 \begin_inset space ~
32308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32310 reference "fig:Page-layout"
32314 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
32317 \begin_layout Standard
32318 \begin_inset Float figure
32324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32327 \begin_inset Tabular
32328 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
32329 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32330 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32331 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32332 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32334 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
32346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32352 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32363 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32381 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32392 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
32395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32396 The normal text on the page goes here.
32397 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
32399 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
32400 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
32405 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32414 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32425 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32443 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32454 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
32466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32472 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32490 \begin_inset Caption Standard
32492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32495 name "fig:Page-layout"
32499 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
32512 \begin_layout Standard
32513 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32521 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
32525 \begin_inset space ~
32530 is set to “Default”.
32531 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
32540 \begin_layout Subsection
32544 \begin_layout Standard
32545 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
32546 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
32547 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
32548 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
32550 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
32552 Defining the footer line works similarly.
32555 \begin_layout Standard
32556 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
32557 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32563 \begin_inset space ~
32571 \begin_layout Description
32574 thepage prints the current page number
32577 \begin_layout Description
32580 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
32583 \begin_layout Description
32586 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
32589 \begin_layout Description
32592 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
32593 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
32596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32600 \begin_inset Quotes prd
32603 because it usually goes in a left header.
32606 \begin_layout Description
32609 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
32610 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
32612 It is normally used in the right header.
32615 \begin_layout Subsection
32616 Default header/footer
32619 \begin_layout Standard
32620 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
32621 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
32622 footer has the page number.
32623 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
32624 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
32625 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
32628 \begin_inset space ~
32636 \begin_layout Subsection
32640 \begin_layout Standard
32641 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
32642 Some pages are different.
32643 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
32644 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
32645 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
32646 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
32647 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
32650 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32651 Header and footer decoration line
32654 \begin_layout Standard
32655 By default, you get a 0.4
32656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32659 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
32660 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
32672 in the following way:
32675 \begin_layout Standard
32682 headrulewidth}{thickness}
32685 \begin_layout Standard
32686 where thickness is a size in standard units like
32699 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
32700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32706 \begin_layout Standard
32707 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32709 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
32710 \begin_inset space ~
32714 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32724 Several header/footer lines
32727 \begin_layout Standard
32728 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
32729 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
32730 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
32732 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32747 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32748 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32750 \begin_inset space ~
32758 \begin_layout Standard
32765 headheight}{height}
32768 \begin_layout Standard
32773 is a size in standard units (e.
32774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32778 \begin_inset space \space{}
32786 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
32787 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
32788 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32789 logfile with the menu
32791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32793 \begin_inset space ~
32801 \begin_inset space ~
32806 to see if you can find a warning about the package
32811 \begin_inset Index idx
32814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32816 -packages ! fancyhdr
32822 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
32823 for your header/footer.
32826 \begin_layout Subsection
32830 \begin_layout Standard
32831 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
32832 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
32833 This example consists of the following definition:
32836 \begin_layout Description
32838 \begin_inset space ~
32847 , empty optional argument
32850 \begin_layout Description
32852 \begin_inset space ~
32855 Header empty, empty optional argument
32858 \begin_layout Description
32860 \begin_inset space ~
32869 in the optional argument
32872 \begin_layout Description
32874 \begin_inset space ~
32883 in the optional argument
32886 \begin_layout Description
32888 \begin_inset space ~
32901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32905 \begin_inset Newline newline
32909 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
32913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32916 in the optional argument
32919 \begin_layout Description
32921 \begin_inset space ~
32930 , empty optional argument
32933 \begin_layout Description
32936 headrulewidth set to 2
32937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32943 \begin_layout Standard
32944 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
32945 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
32951 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32960 \begin_layout Standard
32961 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32967 \begin_layout Standard
32971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32975 pagestyle{headings}
32981 \begin_inset Note Note
32984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32985 switches back to page style with the default headings
32993 \begin_layout Section
32994 Previewing Snippets of your Document
32995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32997 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
33002 \begin_inset Index idx
33005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33012 \begin_inset Index idx
33015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33024 \begin_layout Standard
33026 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
33027 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
33028 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
33031 \begin_layout Subsection
33035 \begin_layout Standard
33036 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33042 \begin_inset Index idx
33045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33047 -packages ! preview-latex
33052 (on some systems named simply
33057 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33059 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33065 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33067 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
33075 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
33076 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33077 -package are automatically
33078 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
33082 \begin_layout Subsection
33086 \begin_layout Standard
33087 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
33088 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
33090 activate the option
33093 \begin_inset space ~
33100 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33106 \begin_inset space ~
33110 \begin_inset space ~
33113 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
33120 \begin_inset space ~
33133 \begin_inset space ~
33138 is the multiplication factor for the size.
33141 \begin_layout Standard
33142 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
33147 \begin_inset space ~
33155 \begin_inset space ~
33163 \begin_layout Standard
33164 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
33165 and when you finish
33169 \begin_layout Standard
33170 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33178 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
33179 generated by activating the option
33182 \begin_inset space ~
33188 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
33196 \begin_layout Subsection
33197 Selected document parts
33200 \begin_layout Standard
33201 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
33202 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
33203 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
33204 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33206 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
33208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33212 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
33213 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
33214 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
33217 \begin_layout Standard
33218 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33225 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33237 is explained in section
33239 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
33244 \begin_inset space ~
33254 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
33255 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
33256 the final rotated boxes,
33257 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
33258 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
33260 Here is the result:
33263 \begin_layout Standard
33264 \begin_inset Preview
33266 \begin_layout Standard
33271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33275 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
33281 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
33291 height_special "totalheight"
33296 backgroundcolor "none"
33299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33324 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
33330 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
33337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33352 \begin_layout Standard
33353 Previewing works also for colors.
33354 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33373 is explained in section
33380 \begin_inset space ~
33393 \begin_layout Standard
33394 \begin_inset Preview
33396 \begin_layout Standard
33400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33419 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
33424 This is text within a colored, framed box.
33428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33443 \begin_layout Standard
33444 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
33450 \begin_layout Standard
33451 If \SpecialChar LyX
33452 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
33453 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
33454 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
33455 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33456 packages in your document preamble that are required by
33457 the \SpecialChar TeX
33459 If \SpecialChar LyX
33460 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
33461 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
33463 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
33464 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
33465 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
33468 \begin_layout Subsection
33473 \begin_layout Standard
33474 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33475 source of the whole document or parts of it.
33478 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
33480 \begin_inset space ~
33485 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33487 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
33489 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
33490 's main window, then only this selection
33491 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
33492 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
33493 the source view window.
33498 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
33499 ; but note that if you have
33500 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
33502 not just the one which is open at the time.
33505 \begin_layout Section
33506 Advanced Find and Replace
33507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33509 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
33514 \begin_inset Index idx
33517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33524 \begin_inset Index idx
33527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33536 \begin_layout Subsection
33540 \begin_layout Standard
33541 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
33542 allows for searching of complex,
33543 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
33545 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
33546 The key-features are:
33549 \begin_layout Itemize
33550 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
33551 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
33552 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
33556 \begin_layout Itemize
33557 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
33558 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
33559 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
33560 a section heading will only be found within section headings
33563 \begin_layout Itemize
33564 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
33565 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
33566 outside of mathematics environments
33569 \begin_layout Itemize
33570 Search may be widened to a specific
33575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33579 \begin_inset space ~
33582 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
33583 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
33590 \begin_layout Itemize
33591 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
33592 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
33593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33597 \begin_inset space ~
33600 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
33603 \begin_layout Subsection
33607 \begin_layout Standard
33608 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
33610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33623 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
33626 ) or the toolbar button
33629 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
33635 Advanced Find and Replace
33640 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33644 \begin_layout Standard
33650 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
33654 \begin_inset space ~
33659 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
33662 arg "paragraph-break"
33666 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
33667 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
33671 arg "paragraph-break"
33674 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
33678 searches backwards.
33681 \begin_layout Standard
33685 \begin_inset space ~
33690 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
33699 \begin_inset space ~
33704 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
33707 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33708 Searching for mathematics
33711 \begin_layout Standard
33712 Mathematical formulas, such as
33713 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
33716 or something more complex like
33717 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
33720 , may be searched for by typing them in the
33725 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
33726 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
33727 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
33728 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
33734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33738 \begin_layout Standard
33739 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
33740 This is done by switching to the
33744 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
33749 This way, entering in the
33756 \begin_layout Itemize
33757 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
33758 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
33761 \begin_layout Itemize
33762 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
33763 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
33766 \begin_layout Itemize
33767 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
33768 of it only within section headings.
33769 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
33770 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
33774 \begin_layout Itemize
33775 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
33776 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
33779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33783 \begin_layout Standard
33784 The entries made in the
33788 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
33791 \begin_inset space ~
33797 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
33801 button or alternatively press
33804 arg "paragraph-break"
33811 while the cursor is in the
33814 \begin_inset space ~
33822 \begin_layout Standard
33823 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
33825 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
33829 \begin_layout Itemize
33830 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
33831 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
33832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33839 with its typewriter version
33840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33854 \begin_layout Itemize
33855 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
33857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33861 \begin_inset Formula $R$
33865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33873 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
33877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33880 (you may want to enable the
33883 \begin_inset space ~
33891 \begin_inset space ~
33896 options and disable the
33904 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
33905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33912 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
33913 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
33917 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
33920 , or occurrences of
33921 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
33925 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
33931 \begin_layout Subsection
33935 \begin_layout Standard
33936 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
33940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33941 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
33943 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33945 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
33954 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
33960 This is done with the context menu
33962 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33963 Insert Regular Expression
33965 while the cursor is in the
33970 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
33971 expression matching rules
33975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33976 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
33979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33983 \begin_inset space ~
33986 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
33987 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
33993 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
33994 same text in the document.
33995 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
33996 Examples of using such a feature may be:
33999 \begin_layout Enumerate
34000 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
34005 editor the fraction
34006 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
34010 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34013 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
34014 fractions with the given denominator.
34017 \begin_layout Enumerate
34018 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
34030 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34035 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
34036 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
34037 Also, by inserting a
34038 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34041 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
34042 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
34045 \begin_layout Standard
34046 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
34047 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
34048 \begin_inset Formula $()$
34051 , and referring back to them through
34052 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
34056 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
34060 For example, try searching with the regexp
34061 \begin_inset Newline newline
34064 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
34067 \begin_inset Newline newline
34070 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
34073 \begin_layout Standard
34074 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
34077 \begin_layout Standard
34078 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34086 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
34087 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
34088 sub-expressions is absolute.
34090 \begin_inset space ~
34094 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
34097 always refers to the first occurrence of
34098 \begin_inset Formula $()$
34101 in all entered regexps.
34109 \begin_layout Section
34111 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34113 name "sec:Spellchecking"
34118 \begin_inset Index idx
34121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34130 \begin_layout Standard
34132 has a built-in spell checker.
34135 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34142 key or the toolbar button
34145 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
34148 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
34149 beginning of the currently selected text.
34150 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
34151 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
34152 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
34153 scrolled so that it is visible.
34154 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
34155 n, if any could be found.
34156 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
34160 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
34161 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
34164 \begin_layout Standard
34165 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
34168 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34172 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
34173 a different one at the top of the dialog.
34175 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
34176 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
34179 \begin_inset space ~
34187 arg "dialog-show character"
34190 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
34192 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
34195 \begin_layout Standard
34196 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34197 can be downloaded from here:
34198 \begin_inset Newline newline
34202 \begin_inset Flex URL
34205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34207 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
34213 \begin_inset Newline newline
34217 \begin_inset space ~
34220 files for each language.
34221 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
34222 \begin_inset space ~
34225 files into \SpecialChar LyX
34226 's installation subfolder
34234 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
34236 \begin_inset Newline newline
34239 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
34240 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
34241 but in most cases these are
34257 is the language code.
34260 \begin_layout Subsection
34264 \begin_layout Standard
34267 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34268 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34270 \begin_inset space ~
34273 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34276 you can set the following things:
34279 \begin_layout Description
34281 \begin_inset space ~
34284 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
34285 should use for spell checking.
34286 Depending on your platform,
34300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34301 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
34302 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
34317 \begin_inset space ~
34320 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
34323 \begin_layout Description
34325 \begin_inset space ~
34328 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
34329 will always use the given language
34330 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
34333 \begin_layout Description
34335 \begin_inset space ~
34338 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
34340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34344 \begin_inset space \space{}
34348 This should normally not be needed.
34351 \begin_layout Description
34353 \begin_inset space ~
34357 \begin_inset space ~
34360 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
34362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34372 \begin_layout Description
34374 \begin_inset space ~
34377 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
34378 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
34379 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
34380 appear in a context menu.
34381 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
34385 \begin_layout Description
34387 \begin_inset space ~
34391 \begin_inset space ~
34395 \begin_inset space ~
34398 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
34402 \begin_layout Section
34404 \begin_inset Index idx
34407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34416 name "sec:Thesaurus"
34423 \begin_layout Standard
34425 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
34426 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
34435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34436 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34438 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
34447 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
34449 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
34450 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
34451 which are available for many languages.
34454 \begin_layout Standard
34455 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
34456 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
34460 \begin_layout Subsection
34461 Setting up the thesaurus
34464 \begin_layout Standard
34473 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
34477 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
34482 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
34484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34488 \begin_inset space ~
34496 For instance, the US English files are named:
34499 \begin_layout Itemize
34503 \begin_layout Itemize
34507 \begin_layout Standard
34516 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
34517 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
34520 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34521 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34522 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
34524 \begin_inset space ~
34529 ) to the path where they are installed.
34533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34534 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
34535 ies, typical locations are
34541 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
34545 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
34549 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
34552 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
34558 LibreOffice-<Version>
34565 On the Mac, the default location is
34567 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
34568 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
34569 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
34570 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
34571 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
34572 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
34580 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
34581 during the \SpecialChar LyX
34582 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
34586 \begin_layout Standard
34587 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
34588 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
34592 \begin_layout Itemize
34593 \begin_inset Flex URL
34596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34598 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
34606 \begin_layout Standard
34607 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
34608 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
34610 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34611 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34612 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
34614 \begin_inset space ~
34619 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
34621 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
34622 and point \SpecialChar LyX
34626 \begin_layout Standard
34627 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
34629 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
34632 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
34638 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
34641 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
34642 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
34644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34650 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34651 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34652 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
34654 \begin_inset space ~
34659 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
34662 \begin_layout Subsection
34663 Using the thesaurus
34666 \begin_layout Standard
34667 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
34669 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34672 or the toolbar button
34675 arg "thesaurus-entry"
34678 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
34680 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
34682 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
34683 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
34684 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
34693 ), related terms (such as
34696 \begin_inset space ~
34705 ), compounds (such as
34708 \begin_inset space ~
34717 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
34726 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
34729 \begin_layout Standard
34730 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
34731 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
34735 \begin_layout Standard
34736 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
34737 the dictionary, such as the above
34741 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
34742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34746 \begin_inset space \space{}
34749 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
34750 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
34751 For example, looking up the word form
34755 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
34760 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
34761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34765 \begin_inset space \space{}
34776 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
34777 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
34778 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
34781 \begin_layout Section
34783 \begin_inset Index idx
34786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34793 \begin_inset Index idx
34796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34797 Document ! Change Tracking
34803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34805 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
34812 \begin_layout Standard
34813 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
34814 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
34815 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
34816 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
34818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34820 \begin_inset space ~
34823 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34825 \begin_inset space ~
34833 \begin_layout Standard
34834 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
34848 The color depends on the author that made the change.
34849 You can change the color in
34851 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34852 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34854 \begin_inset space ~
34858 \begin_inset space ~
34863 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34869 \begin_inset Index idx
34872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34873 Color ! Change tracking
34878 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
34879 's status bar when the
34880 cursor is in changed text.
34881 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
34884 arg "changes-merge"
34890 \begin_layout Standard
34891 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
34893 \begin_inset Index idx
34896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34905 \begin_layout Standard
34906 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34912 \begin_layout Standard
34913 \begin_inset Graphics
34914 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
34922 \begin_layout Standard
34923 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34929 \begin_layout Standard
34930 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
34933 \begin_layout Standard
34934 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34940 \begin_layout Standard
34941 \begin_inset Tabular
34942 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
34943 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
34944 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34945 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34955 arg "changes-track"
34963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34969 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34971 \begin_inset space ~
34974 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34976 \begin_inset space ~
34985 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34994 arg "changes-output"
35002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35008 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35010 \begin_inset space ~
35013 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35015 \begin_inset space ~
35019 \begin_inset space ~
35023 \begin_inset space ~
35032 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35053 Jumps to the next change
35059 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35068 arg "change-accept"
35076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35082 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35084 \begin_inset space ~
35087 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35089 \begin_inset space ~
35098 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35107 arg "change-reject"
35115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35121 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35123 \begin_inset space ~
35126 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35128 \begin_inset space ~
35137 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35146 arg "changes-merge"
35154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35160 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35162 \begin_inset space ~
35165 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35167 \begin_inset space ~
35176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35185 arg "all-changes-accept"
35193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35201 \begin_inset space ~
35204 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35206 \begin_inset space ~
35210 \begin_inset space ~
35219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35228 arg "all-changes-reject"
35236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35242 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35244 \begin_inset space ~
35247 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35249 \begin_inset space ~
35253 \begin_inset space ~
35262 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35285 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35286 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
35288 \begin_inset space ~
35297 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35320 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
35322 \begin_inset space ~
35338 \begin_layout Standard
35339 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35345 \begin_layout Standard
35346 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
35366 \begin_layout Standard
35367 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
35368 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
35369 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
35370 the next change after the current cursor position.
35371 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
35372 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
35373 step to the next change.
35374 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
35377 \begin_layout Standard
35378 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
35379 to describe a change.
35382 \begin_layout Standard
35383 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35389 \begin_inset Index idx
35392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35394 -packages ! dvipost
35400 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35402 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35408 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35412 \begin_layout Section
35413 Comparison of Documents
35414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35416 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
35421 \begin_inset Index idx
35424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35425 Comparison of documents
35433 \begin_layout Standard
35434 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
35437 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35441 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
35442 file with change tracking enabled showing the
35444 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
35446 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
35450 \begin_inset space ~
35454 \begin_inset space ~
35458 \begin_inset space ~
35467 \begin_inset space ~
35471 \begin_inset space ~
35475 \begin_inset space ~
35479 \begin_inset space ~
35483 \begin_inset space ~
35487 \begin_inset space ~
35492 enables the change tracking option
35495 \begin_inset space ~
35499 \begin_inset space ~
35503 \begin_inset space ~
35508 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
35511 \begin_layout Section
35512 International Support
35513 \begin_inset Index idx
35516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35517 International support
35525 \begin_layout Standard
35526 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
35527 with any language you want.
35528 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
35529 up \SpecialChar LyX
35531 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35533 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
35540 \begin_layout Standard
35541 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
35542 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
35543 \begin_inset space ~
35547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35549 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
35556 \begin_layout Subsection
35558 \begin_inset Index idx
35561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35568 \begin_inset Index idx
35571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35572 Document ! Settings
35578 \begin_inset Index idx
35581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35582 Document ! Language
35590 \begin_layout Standard
35593 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35594 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35597 dialog lets you set
35599 the language, the quote style and character encoding
35604 \begin_layout Standard
35609 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
35614 \begin_inset space ~
35619 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
35620 For details about the different encoding options see section
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35627 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
35634 \begin_layout Subsection
35635 Keyboard mapping configuration
35636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35638 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
35645 \begin_layout Standard
35646 If you have for example a U.
35647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35650 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
35651 can use an alternate keymap.
35652 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
35657 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35658 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35659 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
35662 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
35663 \begin_inset space ~
35667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35669 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
35674 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
35675 which one you want to use.
35678 \begin_layout Standard
35679 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
35680 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
35681 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
35682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35685 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
35686 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
35687 one to support the characters you want.
35688 This and many other customizations are explained in the
35695 \begin_layout Chapter
35698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35700 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
35707 \begin_layout Standard
35708 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
35709 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
35710 topic inside the user's guide.
35713 \begin_layout Section
35715 \begin_inset Index idx
35718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35727 \begin_layout Standard
35732 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
35735 \begin_layout Subsection
35739 \begin_layout Standard
35740 Creates a new document.
35743 \begin_layout Subsection
35747 \begin_layout Standard
35748 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
35749 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
35750 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
35753 \begin_layout Subsection
35757 \begin_layout Standard
35761 \begin_layout Subsection
35765 \begin_layout Standard
35766 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
35767 Click there on a file to open it.
35770 \begin_layout Subsection
35774 \begin_layout Standard
35775 Closes the current document.
35778 \begin_layout Subsection
35782 \begin_layout Standard
35783 Closes all opened documents.
35786 \begin_layout Subsection
35790 \begin_layout Standard
35791 Saves the actual document.
35794 \begin_layout Subsection
35798 \begin_layout Standard
35799 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
35802 \begin_layout Subsection
35806 \begin_layout Standard
35807 Saves all opened documents.
35810 \begin_layout Subsection
35814 \begin_layout Standard
35815 Reloads the actual document from disk.
35818 \begin_layout Subsection
35822 \begin_layout Standard
35823 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
35824 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
35825 It is described in the section
35827 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
35832 Additional Features
35837 \begin_layout Subsection
35841 \begin_layout Standard
35842 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
35843 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
35845 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
35846 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
35850 \begin_layout Standard
35851 When using the menu entry
35854 \begin_inset space ~
35859 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
35863 \begin_inset space ~
35867 \begin_inset space ~
35871 \begin_inset space ~
35876 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
35877 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
35880 \begin_layout Subsection
35882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35884 name "subsec:Export"
35891 \begin_layout Standard
35892 You can export your document to various file formats.
35893 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
35895 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
35896 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
35897 during its configuration.
35900 \begin_layout Standard
35901 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
35903 \begin_inset space ~
35907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35909 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
35916 \begin_layout Description
35922 \begin_inset space ~
35925 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
35927 \begin_inset space ~
35930 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
35931 \begin_inset Newline newline
35934 Since \SpecialChar LyX
35935 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
35939 \begin_layout Description
35940 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
35946 \begin_layout Description
35948 \begin_inset space ~
35951 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
35957 \begin_layout Description
35958 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
35959 's native DVI-format.
35960 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
35961 files paths or file names in your document.
35963 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
35970 \begin_layout Description
35971 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
35972 in files paths or file names
35975 \begin_layout Description
35977 \begin_inset space ~
35984 ) DVI-format using the program
35986 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35989 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
35993 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36001 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
36009 \begin_layout Description
36011 \begin_inset space ~
36014 (cropped) the same as
36018 but with cropped page margins.
36021 \begin_layout Description
36023 \begin_inset space ~
36026 Dot text file with code in the programming language
36030 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
36035 \begin_layout Description
36039 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36047 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
36055 \begin_layout Description
36057 \begin_inset space ~
36061 \begin_inset space ~
36064 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
36068 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
36076 \begin_layout Description
36080 \begin_inset space ~
36089 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36090 source that is compilable with the program
36092 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36096 \begin_layout Description
36100 \begin_inset space ~
36105 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36106 source, additionally all images used in the document
36107 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
36111 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
36114 \begin_layout Description
36118 \begin_inset space ~
36123 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36124 source code, additionally all images used in the document
36125 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
36133 \begin_layout Description
36137 \begin_inset space ~
36146 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36147 source that is compilable with the program
36153 \begin_layout Description
36155 \begin_inset space ~
36159 \begin_inset space ~
36166 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36167 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
36173 \begin_layout Description
36175 \begin_inset space ~
36178 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
36179 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
36181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36185 \begin_inset space \space{}
36190 \begin_inset space ~
36194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36209 represent the version number)
36212 \begin_layout Description
36214 \begin_inset space ~
36218 \begin_inset space ~
36221 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
36222 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
36223 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36227 \begin_layout Description
36228 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
36229 's internal XHTML engine
36232 \begin_layout Description
36234 \begin_inset space ~
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36242 \begin_inset space ~
36246 \begin_inset space ~
36249 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
36254 For the conversion the program
36263 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36266 \begin_layout Description
36267 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
36272 \begin_layout Description
36274 \begin_inset space ~
36277 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
36279 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
36282 For the conversion the program
36291 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36294 \begin_layout Description
36296 \begin_inset space ~
36299 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
36300 For the conversion the program
36309 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36312 \begin_layout Description
36314 \begin_inset space ~
36317 (cropped) the same as
36320 \begin_inset space ~
36325 but with cropped page margins
36328 \begin_layout Description
36332 \begin_inset space ~
36337 PDF-format using the program
36341 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
36344 \begin_layout Description
36348 \begin_inset space ~
36352 \begin_inset space ~
36360 \begin_inset space ~
36365 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
36366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36370 \begin_inset space \space{}
36373 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
36377 \begin_layout Description
36381 \begin_inset space ~
36386 PDF-format using the program
36388 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36391 , produces PDF-files directly
36394 \begin_layout Description
36398 \begin_inset space ~
36403 PDF-format using the program
36407 , produces PDF-files directly
36410 \begin_layout Description
36414 \begin_inset space ~
36419 PDF-format using the program
36423 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
36426 \begin_layout Description
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36435 PDF-format using the program
36440 , produces PDF-files directly
36443 \begin_layout Description
36447 \begin_inset space ~
36455 \begin_layout Description
36459 \begin_inset space ~
36463 \begin_inset space ~
36468 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
36469 and then exported as text using the program
36474 \begin_layout Description
36479 PostScript format using the program
36487 options see section
36488 \begin_inset space ~
36492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36494 reference "subsec:General-output"
36501 \begin_layout Description
36502 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36503 source and also code in the statistical programming
36517 it is possible to use
36521 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
36525 \begin_layout Standard
36526 If one of the menu entries
36533 \begin_inset space ~
36542 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36544 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
36546 \begin_inset space ~
36550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36552 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36557 \begin_inset Index idx
36560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36561 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
36570 \begin_layout Subsection
36574 \begin_layout Standard
36575 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
36576 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
36579 \begin_inset space ~
36583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36585 reference "sec:Paths"
36590 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
36599 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
36600 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
36601 's preferences as described in section
36602 \begin_inset space ~
36606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36608 reference "subsec:Converters"
36615 \begin_layout Subsection
36616 New and Close Window
36619 \begin_layout Standard
36620 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
36624 \begin_layout Subsection
36628 \begin_layout Standard
36629 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
36632 \begin_layout Section
36634 \begin_inset Index idx
36637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36646 \begin_layout Subsection
36650 \begin_layout Standard
36651 Described in section
36652 \begin_inset space ~
36656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36658 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
36665 \begin_layout Subsection
36666 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
36669 \begin_layout Standard
36670 Described in section
36671 \begin_inset space ~
36675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36677 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36684 \begin_layout Subsection
36688 \begin_layout Standard
36689 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
36690 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
36693 \begin_layout Subsection
36697 \begin_layout Standard
36698 Selects the whole document.
36701 \begin_layout Subsection
36702 Find & Replace (Quick)
36705 \begin_layout Standard
36706 Described in section
36707 \begin_inset space ~
36711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36713 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36720 \begin_layout Subsection
36721 Find & Replace (Advanced)
36724 \begin_layout Standard
36725 Described in section
36726 \begin_inset space ~
36730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36732 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36739 \begin_layout Subsection
36740 Move Paragraph Up/Down
36743 \begin_layout Standard
36744 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
36748 \begin_layout Subsection
36752 \begin_layout Standard
36753 Described in section
36754 \begin_inset space ~
36758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36760 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
36767 \begin_layout Subsection
36769 \begin_inset Index idx
36772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36773 Paragraph ! Settings
36781 \begin_layout Standard
36782 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
36783 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
36787 \begin_layout Standard
36788 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
36789 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
36795 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36796 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36798 \begin_inset space ~
36806 \begin_layout Subsection
36807 Table and Rows & Columns
36810 \begin_layout Standard
36811 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
36812 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
36813 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
36816 \begin_layout Subsection
36820 \begin_layout Standard
36821 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
36822 It will dissolve this inset.
36823 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
36827 \begin_layout Subsection
36831 \begin_layout Standard
36832 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
36833 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
36836 \begin_layout Subsection
36837 Increase/Decrease List Depth
36840 \begin_layout Standard
36841 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
36843 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
36844 \begin_inset space ~
36848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36850 reference "sec:Nesting"
36855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36857 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
36864 \begin_layout Subsection
36867 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
36870 \begin_layout Standard
36871 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
36872 nts of the same type.
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36880 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
36884 for an explanation.
36887 \begin_layout Section
36889 \begin_inset Index idx
36892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36901 \begin_layout Standard
36902 At the bottom of the
36906 menu the opened documents are listed.
36909 \begin_layout Subsection
36910 Open/Close all Insets
36913 \begin_layout Standard
36914 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
36917 \begin_layout Subsection
36918 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
36921 \begin_layout Standard
36922 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
36925 \begin_layout Standard
36926 Math macros are described in the
36933 \begin_layout Subsection
36937 \begin_layout Standard
36938 Shows the outline window as described in sections
36939 \begin_inset space ~
36943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36945 reference "sec:Navigating"
36950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36952 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
36959 \begin_layout Subsection
36963 \begin_layout Standard
36964 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
36966 \begin_inset space ~
36970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36972 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36979 \begin_layout Subsection
36983 \begin_layout Standard
36984 Opens a window showing console messages.
36985 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
36987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36990 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
36991 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
36992 is processing the document.
36995 \begin_layout Subsection
36997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36999 name "subsec:Toolbars"
37004 \begin_inset Index idx
37007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37016 \begin_layout Standard
37017 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
37018 All toolbars and the
37021 \begin_inset space ~
37026 can be turned on and off.
37031 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
37043 \begin_inset space ~
37055 \begin_inset space ~
37060 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
37064 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
37071 \begin_layout Standard
37076 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
37080 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
37081 or when a certain feature is enabled.
37082 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
37083 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
37084 is inside a formula or table respectively.
37087 \begin_layout Standard
37089 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
37090 \begin_inset space ~
37094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37096 reference "sec:Toolbars"
37103 \begin_layout Subsection
37107 \begin_layout Standard
37111 \begin_inset space ~
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37119 \begin_inset space ~
37123 \begin_inset space ~
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37136 will split \SpecialChar LyX
37137 's main window vertically while
37140 \begin_inset space ~
37144 \begin_inset space ~
37148 \begin_inset space ~
37152 \begin_inset space ~
37156 \begin_inset space ~
37160 \begin_inset space ~
37165 will split it horizontally.
37166 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
37167 to view the same document, but at different positions.
37168 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
37169 three or more documents at the same time.
37170 To close a split view, use the menu
37173 \begin_inset space ~
37177 \begin_inset space ~
37185 \begin_layout Subsection
37189 \begin_layout Standard
37190 Closes a split view.
37193 \begin_layout Subsection
37197 \begin_layout Standard
37198 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
37199 so that you will see nothing but your text.
37200 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
37201 's main window fullscreen.
37202 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
37203 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
37206 \begin_layout Section
37208 \begin_inset Index idx
37211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37220 \begin_layout Subsection
37224 \begin_layout Standard
37225 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37232 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
37243 \begin_layout Subsection
37245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37247 name "subsec:Special-Character"
37254 \begin_layout Standard
37255 Here you can insert the following characters:
37258 \begin_layout Description
37263 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
37266 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
37267 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37268 -packages you have installed.
37269 You can get a complete display by checking
37272 \begin_inset space ~
37278 \begin_inset Newline newline
37282 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37290 Not all characters will be visible in the
37294 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
37295 dialog (see section
37296 \begin_inset space ~
37300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37302 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
37306 ) can display every character.
37314 \begin_layout Description
37315 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
37319 \begin_layout Description
37321 \begin_inset space ~
37325 \begin_inset space ~
37328 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
37329 \begin_inset space ~
37333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37335 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
37342 \begin_layout Description
37344 \begin_inset space ~
37347 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
37350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37351 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37357 \begin_layout Description
37359 \begin_inset space ~
37362 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
37365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37366 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37372 \begin_layout Description
37374 \begin_inset space ~
37377 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
37381 \begin_layout Description
37383 \begin_inset space ~
37386 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
37390 \begin_layout Description
37392 \begin_inset space ~
37395 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
37401 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
37407 \begin_layout Description
37409 \begin_inset space ~
37412 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
37416 \begin_layout Description
37418 \begin_inset space ~
37422 \begin_inset Index idx
37425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37432 \begin_inset Index idx
37435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37436 Language ! Phonetic symbols
37441 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
37442 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
37444 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37450 \begin_inset Index idx
37453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37461 \begin_inset Newline newline
37464 More information about this feature can be found in the
37470 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
37476 \begin_layout Description
37477 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
37479 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
37480 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
37484 \begin_layout Subsection
37488 \begin_layout Standard
37489 Opens a submenu with the following options:
37492 \begin_layout Description
37493 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
37494 \begin_inset script superscript
37496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37505 \begin_layout Description
37506 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
37507 \begin_inset script subscript
37509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37518 \begin_layout Description
37520 \begin_inset space ~
37523 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
37524 \begin_inset space ~
37528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37530 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
37537 \begin_layout Description
37539 \begin_inset space ~
37542 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
37543 \begin_inset space ~
37547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37549 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
37556 \begin_layout Description
37558 \begin_inset space ~
37561 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
37562 \begin_inset space ~
37566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37568 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
37575 \begin_layout Description
37577 \begin_inset space ~
37580 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
37582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37586 \begin_inset space \space{}
37589 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
37590 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
37596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37599 To insert a fraction use the command
37604 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
37608 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
37614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37617 The visible space is hereby the character before the
37624 \begin_layout Description
37626 \begin_inset space ~
37629 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
37630 \begin_inset space ~
37634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37636 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
37643 \begin_layout Description
37645 \begin_inset space ~
37648 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
37649 \begin_inset space ~
37653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37655 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
37662 \begin_layout Description
37664 \begin_inset space ~
37667 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
37668 \begin_inset space ~
37672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37674 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
37681 \begin_layout Description
37682 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37689 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
37696 \begin_layout Description
37698 \begin_inset space ~
37701 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
37702 \begin_inset space ~
37706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37708 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
37715 \begin_layout Description
37717 \begin_inset space ~
37720 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
37721 \begin_inset space ~
37725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37727 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
37734 \begin_layout Description
37736 \begin_inset space ~
37740 \begin_inset space ~
37743 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
37744 \begin_inset space ~
37748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37750 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37757 \begin_layout Description
37759 \begin_inset space ~
37762 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
37763 as described in section
37764 \begin_inset space ~
37768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37770 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37777 \begin_layout Description
37779 \begin_inset space ~
37782 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
37783 \begin_inset space ~
37787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37789 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37796 \begin_layout Description
37798 \begin_inset space ~
37801 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
37802 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
37804 \begin_inset space ~
37808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37810 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37817 \begin_layout Description
37819 \begin_inset space ~
37822 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
37823 \begin_inset space ~
37827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37829 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37836 \begin_layout Description
37838 \begin_inset space ~
37842 \begin_inset space ~
37845 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
37846 \begin_inset space ~
37850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37852 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37859 \begin_layout Subsection
37863 \begin_layout Standard
37864 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
37868 \begin_inset space ~
37889 are described in section
37890 \begin_inset space ~
37894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37896 reference "sec:toc"
37905 is described in section
37906 \begin_inset space ~
37910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37912 reference "sec:Index"
37920 is described in section
37921 \begin_inset space ~
37925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37927 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37933 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37936 is described in section
37937 \begin_inset space ~
37941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37943 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
37950 \begin_layout Subsection
37954 \begin_layout Standard
37955 To insert floats, as described in section
37956 \begin_inset space ~
37960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37962 reference "sec:Floats"
37966 and in detail the chapter
37973 \begin_inset space ~
37981 \begin_layout Subsection
37985 \begin_layout Standard
37986 To insert notes, described in section
37987 \begin_inset space ~
37991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37993 reference "sec:Notes"
38000 \begin_layout Subsection
38004 \begin_layout Standard
38005 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
38007 Branches are described in section
38008 \begin_inset space ~
38012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38014 reference "sec:Branches"
38021 \begin_layout Subsection
38025 \begin_layout Standard
38026 Inserts document class-specific insets.
38027 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
38029 An example is the document class
38030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38037 with three custom insets.
38040 Flex insets and InsetLayout
38044 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
38050 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
38053 \begin_layout Subsection
38055 \begin_inset Index idx
38058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38067 \begin_layout Standard
38068 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
38070 For more information see chapter
38072 External Document Parts
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38081 \begin_layout Subsection
38083 \begin_inset Index idx
38086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38095 \begin_layout Standard
38096 Inserts a box in a certain style.
38097 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38112 \begin_layout Subsection
38116 \begin_layout Standard
38121 dialog as described in section
38122 \begin_inset space ~
38126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38128 reference "sec:Bibliography"
38135 \begin_layout Subsection
38139 \begin_layout Standard
38144 as described in section
38145 \begin_inset space ~
38149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38151 reference "sec:Cross-References"
38158 \begin_layout Subsection
38162 \begin_layout Standard
38167 as described in section
38168 \begin_inset space ~
38172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38174 reference "sec:Cross-References"
38181 \begin_layout Subsection
38183 \begin_inset Index idx
38186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38193 \begin_inset Index idx
38196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38197 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
38205 \begin_layout Standard
38206 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
38207 Floats are described in section
38208 \begin_inset space ~
38212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38214 reference "sec:Floats"
38218 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
38220 Multi-page Captions
38225 \begin_inset space ~
38233 \begin_layout Subsection
38237 \begin_layout Standard
38238 Inserts an index entry as described in section
38239 \begin_inset space ~
38243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38245 reference "sec:Index"
38252 \begin_layout Subsection
38256 \begin_layout Standard
38257 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
38258 \begin_inset space ~
38262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38264 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38271 \begin_layout Subsection
38275 \begin_layout Standard
38276 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
38277 Tables are described in section
38278 \begin_inset space ~
38282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38284 reference "sec:Tables"
38288 and in detail in the chapter
38295 \begin_inset space ~
38303 \begin_layout Subsection
38307 \begin_layout Standard
38313 Graphics are described in section
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38320 reference "sec:Graphics"
38327 \begin_layout Subsection
38331 \begin_layout Standard
38332 Inserts a URL as described in section
38333 \begin_inset space ~
38337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38339 reference "subsec:URLs"
38346 \begin_layout Subsection
38350 \begin_layout Standard
38351 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
38352 \begin_inset space ~
38356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38358 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
38365 \begin_layout Subsection
38369 \begin_layout Standard
38370 Inserts a footnote as described in section
38371 \begin_inset space ~
38375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38377 reference "sec:Footnotes"
38384 \begin_layout Subsection
38388 \begin_layout Standard
38389 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
38390 \begin_inset space ~
38394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38396 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
38403 \begin_layout Subsection
38407 \begin_layout Standard
38408 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
38409 title or caption of a float.
38410 Inserts a short title as described in section
38411 \begin_inset space ~
38415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38417 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
38424 \begin_layout Subsection
38429 \begin_layout Standard
38430 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
38431 Code box as described in section
38432 \begin_inset space ~
38436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38438 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
38445 \begin_layout Subsection
38447 \begin_inset Index idx
38450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38459 \begin_layout Standard
38460 Inserts a program listings box.
38461 Program listings are explained in the chapter
38463 Program Code Listings
38468 \begin_inset space ~
38476 \begin_layout Subsection
38480 \begin_layout Standard
38481 Inserts the actual date.
38482 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
38486 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
38494 \begin_inset space ~
38502 \begin_layout Subsection
38506 \begin_layout Standard
38507 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
38508 \begin_inset space ~
38512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38514 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38521 \begin_layout Section
38523 \begin_inset Index idx
38526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38535 \begin_layout Standard
38536 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
38537 \begin_inset space ~
38540 of the current document.
38541 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
38544 \begin_layout Subsection
38548 \begin_layout Standard
38549 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
38550 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
38551 to jump, for example, between section
38552 \begin_inset space ~
38556 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
38557 \begin_inset space ~
38560 2.5 and use the submenu
38563 \begin_inset space ~
38567 \begin_inset space ~
38574 \begin_inset space ~
38580 \begin_inset space ~
38584 \begin_inset space ~
38590 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
38594 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
38600 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
38603 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
38606 \begin_layout Standard
38607 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
38611 \begin_inset space ~
38616 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
38619 \begin_inset space ~
38624 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
38627 \begin_layout Subsection
38628 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
38631 \begin_layout Standard
38632 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
38636 \begin_layout Subsection
38640 \begin_layout Standard
38641 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
38642 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
38643 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
38647 \begin_inset space ~
38651 \begin_inset space ~
38659 \begin_layout Subsection
38663 \begin_layout Standard
38664 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
38667 The \SpecialChar LyX
38668 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
38670 \begin_inset space ~
38678 \begin_inset space ~
38683 manual for a detailed description.
38686 \begin_layout Section
38688 \begin_inset Index idx
38691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38700 \begin_layout Subsection
38704 \begin_layout Standard
38705 Change Tracking is described in section
38706 \begin_inset space ~
38710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38712 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
38719 \begin_layout Subsection
38727 \begin_layout Standard
38728 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
38729 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
38730 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38732 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
38733 to the clipboard or update the view.
38734 \begin_inset Newline newline
38737 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38741 \begin_layout Standard
38744 Open Containing Directory
38746 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
38747 's temporary folder for the document.
38748 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
38749 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
38750 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
38751 For example some journals require to send the
38755 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38759 \begin_layout Subsection
38760 Start Appendix Here
38763 \begin_layout Standard
38764 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
38765 as described in section
38766 \begin_inset space ~
38770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38772 reference "sec:Appendices"
38779 \begin_layout Subsection
38781 \begin_inset space ~
38787 \begin_layout Standard
38788 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
38789 default output format for the document (menu
38791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38792 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38793 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38795 \begin_inset space ~
38799 \begin_inset space ~
38805 \begin_inset space ~
38809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38811 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
38815 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
38818 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38819 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38821 \begin_inset space ~
38824 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38826 \begin_inset space ~
38829 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38831 \begin_inset space ~
38835 \begin_inset space ~
38841 \begin_inset space ~
38845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38847 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38851 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
38852 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38854 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38855 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38857 \begin_inset space ~
38860 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38862 \begin_inset space ~
38865 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38869 \begin_inset space ~
38873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38875 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38880 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38881 when it is first configured.
38882 The default output format is
38885 \begin_inset space ~
38893 \begin_layout Subsection
38894 View (Other Formats)
38897 \begin_layout Standard
38898 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
38899 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
38900 actual document with an external program.
38901 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
38902 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38903 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
38905 All possible formats are listed in section
38906 \begin_inset space ~
38910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38912 reference "subsec:Export"
38917 You should at least see the menu entry
38922 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38924 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38926 \begin_inset space ~
38930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38932 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38937 \begin_inset Index idx
38940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38941 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38950 \begin_layout Standard
38951 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
38952 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38954 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38955 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38957 \begin_inset space ~
38960 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38962 \begin_inset space ~
38965 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38969 \begin_inset space ~
38973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38975 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38980 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38981 when it is first configured.
38984 \begin_layout Subsection
38986 \begin_inset space ~
38992 \begin_layout Standard
38993 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
38994 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
38997 \begin_layout Subsection
38998 Update (Other Formats)
39001 \begin_layout Standard
39002 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
39003 your document without opening a new viewer window.
39006 \begin_layout Subsection
39007 View Master Document
39010 \begin_layout Standard
39011 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39027 \begin_inset space ~
39032 manual for more information on this topic).
39033 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
39034 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
39038 \begin_inset space ~
39042 \begin_inset space ~
39047 generates the output of the whole book, while
39051 will just output the chapter alone.
39054 \begin_layout Standard
39055 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
39056 in the document settings (menu
39058 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39059 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39060 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39062 \begin_inset space ~
39066 \begin_inset space ~
39072 \begin_inset space ~
39076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39078 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39082 ) or in the preferences (menu
39084 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39085 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39087 \begin_inset space ~
39090 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39092 \begin_inset space ~
39095 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39097 \begin_inset space ~
39101 \begin_inset space ~
39107 \begin_inset space ~
39111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39113 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39120 \begin_layout Subsection
39121 Update Master Document
39124 \begin_layout Standard
39125 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39141 \begin_inset space ~
39146 manual for more information on this topic).
39147 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
39148 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
39151 \begin_layout Standard
39152 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
39153 in the document settings (menu
39155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39156 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39157 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39159 \begin_inset space ~
39163 \begin_inset space ~
39169 \begin_inset space ~
39173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39175 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39179 ) or in the preferences (menu
39181 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39182 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39184 \begin_inset space ~
39187 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39189 \begin_inset space ~
39192 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39194 \begin_inset space ~
39198 \begin_inset space ~
39204 \begin_inset space ~
39208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39210 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39217 \begin_layout Subsection
39219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39221 name "subsec:Compressed"
39228 \begin_layout Standard
39229 Un/compresses the current document.
39230 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
39231 compression (see the
39233 Additional Features
39235 manual for details).
39238 \begin_layout Subsection
39242 \begin_layout Standard
39243 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
39246 \begin_layout Subsection
39250 \begin_layout Standard
39251 The document settings are described in appendix
39252 \begin_inset space ~
39256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39258 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39265 \begin_layout Section
39267 \begin_inset Index idx
39270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39279 \begin_layout Subsection
39283 \begin_layout Standard
39284 Spell checking is explained in section
39285 \begin_inset space ~
39289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39291 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
39298 \begin_layout Subsection
39302 \begin_layout Standard
39303 The thesaurus is described in section
39304 \begin_inset space ~
39308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39310 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
39317 \begin_layout Subsection
39319 \begin_inset Index idx
39322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39329 \begin_inset Index idx
39332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39341 \begin_layout Standard
39342 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
39343 the highlighted document part.
39346 \begin_layout Subsection
39352 \begin_inset Index idx
39355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39356 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
39365 \begin_layout Standard
39366 Generates with the help of the program
39368 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
39371 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
39372 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
39373 This feature is not available on Windows.
39376 \begin_layout Subsection
39382 \begin_inset Index idx
39385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39395 \begin_layout Standard
39396 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39401 \begin_inset space ~
39406 to see the full filename paths.
39409 \begin_layout Subsection
39411 \begin_inset Index idx
39414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39423 \begin_layout Standard
39424 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
39425 files as described in section
39426 \begin_inset space ~
39430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39432 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39439 \begin_layout Subsection
39441 \begin_inset Index idx
39444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39457 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39475 \begin_inset Index idx
39478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39479 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39488 \begin_layout Standard
39489 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
39490 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
39491 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39492 -packages and programs it needs; see
39494 \begin_inset space ~
39498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39500 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39507 \begin_layout Subsection
39511 \begin_layout Standard
39516 dialog as described in detail in appendix
39517 \begin_inset space ~
39521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39523 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
39530 \begin_layout Section
39532 \begin_inset Index idx
39535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39544 \begin_layout Standard
39545 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
39546 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
39548 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
39552 \begin_layout Standard
39556 \begin_inset space ~
39561 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
39562 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39563 packages and classes found
39564 by \SpecialChar LyX
39566 \begin_inset space ~
39570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39572 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
39579 \begin_layout Standard
39583 \begin_inset space ~
39588 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
39593 \begin_layout Section
39595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39597 name "sec:Toolbars"
39604 \begin_layout Standard
39605 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
39606 \begin_inset space ~
39610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39612 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
39619 \begin_layout Standard
39620 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
39621 This is described in the
39623 Additional Features
39628 \begin_layout Subsection
39630 \begin_inset Index idx
39633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39642 \begin_layout Standard
39643 \begin_inset Graphics
39644 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
39652 \begin_layout Standard
39653 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39659 \begin_layout Standard
39660 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39677 \begin_inset Note Note
39680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39681 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
39686 manual for more information.
39694 \begin_layout Standard
39695 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39701 \begin_layout Standard
39702 \begin_inset Tabular
39703 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
39704 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39705 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
39706 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
39708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39712 \begin_inset Graphics
39713 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
39723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39727 pull-down box for the environments
39740 \begin_layout Standard
39741 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
39747 \begin_layout Standard
39749 \begin_inset Tabular
39750 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
39751 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39752 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39753 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39754 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39777 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39807 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39837 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39853 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
39861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39867 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39883 arg "spelling-continuously"
39891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39895 Spellcheck continuously
39901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39924 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39954 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39984 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39991 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40014 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40044 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40060 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
40068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40074 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40100 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
40108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40142 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
40150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40156 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
40157 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
40164 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40185 Emphasize text, function of the
40187 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40192 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40201 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40222 Set text to noun style, function of the
40224 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40226 \begin_inset space ~
40229 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40238 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40247 arg "textstyle-apply"
40255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40259 Format text using the current settings in the
40261 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40263 \begin_inset space ~
40266 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40299 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40301 \begin_inset space ~
40310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40319 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
40327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40340 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40347 arg "tabular-insert"
40355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40361 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40377 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
40385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40389 Toggle outline window on/off,
40391 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
40398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40407 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
40415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40419 Toggle math toolbar on/off
40425 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40434 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
40442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40446 Toggle table toolbar on/off
40459 \begin_layout Subsection
40461 \begin_inset Index idx
40464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40473 \begin_layout Standard
40474 \begin_inset Graphics
40475 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
40483 \begin_layout Standard
40484 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40490 \begin_layout Standard
40491 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40495 \begin_layout Standard
40496 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40502 \begin_layout Standard
40503 \begin_inset Tabular
40504 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
40505 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40506 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40507 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40508 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40535 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40544 arg "layout Enumerate"
40552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40571 arg "layout Itemize"
40579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40589 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40616 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40625 arg "layout Description"
40633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40652 arg "depth-increment"
40660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40666 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40672 \begin_inset space ~
40681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40690 arg "depth-decrement"
40698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40704 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40706 \begin_inset space ~
40710 \begin_inset space ~
40719 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40728 arg "float-insert figure"
40736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40743 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40750 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40759 arg "float-insert table"
40767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40774 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40781 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40804 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40820 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
40828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40850 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
40858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40894 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40896 \begin_inset space ~
40905 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40914 arg "nomencl-insert"
40922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40930 \begin_inset space ~
40939 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40948 arg "footnote-insert"
40956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40962 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40969 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40978 arg "marginalnote-insert"
40986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40994 \begin_inset space ~
41003 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41026 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41027 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
41029 \begin_inset space ~
41038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41047 arg "box-insert Frameless"
41055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41098 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41123 \begin_inset space ~
41132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41141 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
41149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41156 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41172 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
41180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41187 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41198 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41207 arg "dialog-show character"
41215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41221 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41226 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41242 arg "layout-paragraph"
41250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41256 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41258 \begin_inset space ~
41267 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41276 arg "thesaurus-entry"
41284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41290 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41304 \begin_layout Subsection
41305 View/Update Toolbar
41306 \begin_inset Index idx
41309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41310 Toolbar ! View / Update
41318 \begin_layout Standard
41319 \begin_inset Graphics
41320 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
41327 \begin_layout Standard
41328 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41334 \begin_layout Standard
41335 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41339 \begin_layout Standard
41340 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41346 \begin_layout Standard
41347 \begin_inset Tabular
41348 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
41349 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41350 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41351 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41375 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41391 arg "buffer-update"
41399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41405 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41421 arg "master-buffer-view"
41429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41435 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41437 \begin_inset space ~
41446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41455 arg "master-buffer-update"
41463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41471 \begin_inset space ~
41475 \begin_inset space ~
41484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41493 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
41501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41507 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41508 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41509 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41510 Synchronize with Output
41516 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41540 View (Other Formats)
41546 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41553 arg "update-others"
41561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41568 Update (Other Formats)
41581 \begin_layout Standard
41582 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
41586 \begin_layout Subsection
41590 \begin_layout Standard
41591 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
41592 \begin_inset space ~
41596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41598 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41602 , the table toolbar
41603 \begin_inset Index idx
41606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41615 \begin_inset space ~
41620 manual and the math macro toolbar
41621 \begin_inset Index idx
41624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41637 \begin_layout Chapter
41638 The Document Settings
41639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41641 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41646 \begin_inset Index idx
41649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41650 Document ! Settings
41658 \begin_layout Standard
41662 \begin_inset space ~
41667 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
41668 is called with the menu
41670 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41674 You can save your document settings as default with the
41676 Save as Document Defaults
41678 button in any dialog.
41679 This will create a template named
41683 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
41684 when you create a new document without
41688 \begin_layout Standard
41693 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
41694 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
41697 \begin_layout Standard
41698 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
41699 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
41700 to find the one you are looking for.
41701 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
41702 the submenus of the dialog.
41704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41708 \begin_inset space \space{}
41712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41719 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
41720 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
41721 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
41724 \begin_layout Section
41728 \begin_layout Standard
41729 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
41731 Document classes are described in section
41732 \begin_inset space ~
41736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41738 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
41746 \begin_layout Standard
41750 \begin_inset space ~
41755 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
41760 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
41761 as a layout for a document class.
41762 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
41764 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
41773 \begin_layout Standard
41774 Some classes use special class options by default.
41775 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
41779 and you can decide to use them or not.
41780 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
41781 recommended you leave them untouched.
41786 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41787 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
41792 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41794 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
41799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41800 When you want to use one of the following drivers
41801 \begin_inset Newline newline
41806 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
41809 \begin_inset Newline newline
41812 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41813 distribution, see section
41818 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41820 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
41832 \begin_layout Standard
41837 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
41838 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
41839 in the background if the child document
41840 is opened without its master.
41841 This way child documents are always compilable.
41842 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
41849 \begin_inset space ~
41857 \begin_layout Standard
41858 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41869 \begin_inset Index idx
41872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41874 -packages ! prettyref
41880 \begin_inset Index idx
41883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41885 -packages ! refstyle
41890 for cross-references, see section
41891 \begin_inset space ~
41895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41897 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41904 \begin_layout Section
41908 \begin_layout Standard
41909 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
41910 Please refer to the section
41913 \begin_inset space ~
41921 \begin_inset space ~
41926 manual for details.
41929 \begin_layout Section
41933 \begin_layout Standard
41934 Modules are explained in section
41935 \begin_inset space ~
41939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41941 reference "subsec:Modules"
41948 \begin_layout Section
41952 \begin_layout Standard
41954 \begin_inset space ~
41958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41960 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
41967 \begin_layout Section
41971 \begin_layout Standard
41972 The document font settings are described in section
41973 \begin_inset space ~
41977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41979 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
41986 \begin_layout Section
41990 \begin_layout Standard
41991 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
42003 \begin_inset space ~
42008 and whether it should be a
42011 \begin_inset space ~
42016 can also be specified here.
42019 \begin_layout Standard
42020 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
42021 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
42022 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
42024 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
42027 \begin_layout Standard
42030 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
42033 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
42034 justifies the text on screen.
42035 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
42039 \begin_layout Section
42043 \begin_layout Standard
42044 This dialog is described in sections
42045 \begin_inset space ~
42049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42051 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
42056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42058 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
42065 \begin_layout Section
42069 \begin_layout Standard
42070 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
42071 \begin_inset space ~
42075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42077 reference "subsec:Margins"
42084 \begin_layout Section
42086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42088 name "sec:Language-encodings"
42093 \begin_inset Index idx
42096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42097 Language ! Encoding
42105 \begin_layout Standard
42106 The document language and quote styles are set here.
42107 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
42108 (the \SpecialChar LyX
42110 is always encoded in utf8).
42111 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
42112 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
42113 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42114 -command is not known for
42115 a particular character).
42118 \begin_layout Standard
42119 If you use the option
42124 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
42125 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
42126 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42128 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
42129 exactly one encoding.
42130 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
42133 \begin_layout Standard
42135 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
42136 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
42137 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42138 installation supports Unicode), choose
42139 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
42140 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
42141 is quite incomplete, so
42142 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
42147 (when \SpecialChar LyX
42148 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
42149 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
42150 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
42151 -commands is not used, because all
42152 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
42153 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42154 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42155 , two new alternative engines
42156 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
42158 Both engines support Unicode natively.
42160 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
42163 \begin_inset space ~
42171 \begin_inset space ~
42179 \begin_inset space ~
42185 \begin_inset space ~
42189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42191 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
42196 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
42200 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
42203 \begin_layout Standard
42207 \begin_inset space ~
42212 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42213 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
42215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42223 The possible settings are:
42226 \begin_layout Description
42227 Default uses the language package that is selected in
42229 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42230 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42234 \begin_inset space ~
42238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42240 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
42247 \begin_layout Description
42248 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
42249 format you will use.
42250 In many cases this will be
42255 \begin_inset Index idx
42258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42266 If the newer package
42271 \begin_inset Index idx
42274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42276 -packages ! polyglossia
42281 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42282 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42283 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
42285 this package will be used instead of
42292 \begin_layout Description
42294 \begin_inset space ~
42305 would be more appropriate.
42308 \begin_layout Description
42309 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
42310 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
42314 (for German texts), type in
42317 \begin_inset Newline newline
42322 usepackage{ngerman}
42325 \begin_layout Description
42326 None will not use a language package.
42327 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
42330 \begin_layout Standard
42331 Here is a list with the important encodings:
42334 \begin_layout Description
42336 \begin_inset space ~
42340 \begin_inset space ~
42344 \begin_inset space ~
42351 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42357 \begin_inset Index idx
42360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42362 -packages ! inputenc
42368 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
42369 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
42370 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
42374 \begin_layout Description
42375 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
42377 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
42378 commands, which may result in a big
42379 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
42380 -commands are needed.
42383 \begin_layout Description
42385 \begin_inset space ~
42389 \begin_inset space ~
42392 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
42395 \begin_layout Description
42397 \begin_inset space ~
42401 \begin_inset space ~
42404 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
42407 \begin_layout Description
42409 \begin_inset space ~
42412 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
42415 \begin_layout Description
42417 \begin_inset space ~
42421 \begin_inset space ~
42424 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
42425 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
42428 \begin_layout Description
42430 \begin_inset space ~
42434 \begin_inset space ~
42437 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
42441 \begin_layout Description
42443 \begin_inset space ~
42447 \begin_inset space ~
42450 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
42451 ISO-8859-13 encoding
42454 \begin_layout Description
42456 \begin_inset space ~
42460 \begin_inset space ~
42464 \begin_inset space ~
42467 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
42468 \begin_inset space ~
42474 \begin_layout Description
42476 \begin_inset space ~
42480 \begin_inset space ~
42484 \begin_inset space ~
42487 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
42488 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
42491 \begin_layout Description
42493 \begin_inset space ~
42497 \begin_inset space ~
42500 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
42501 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
42502 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42503 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
42504 \begin_inset space ~
42508 \begin_inset space ~
42514 \begin_layout Description
42516 \begin_inset space ~
42520 \begin_inset space ~
42523 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
42524 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
42525 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42527 should try to use the encoding Unicode
42528 \begin_inset space ~
42532 \begin_inset space ~
42538 \begin_layout Description
42540 \begin_inset space ~
42544 \begin_inset space ~
42547 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
42550 \begin_layout Description
42552 \begin_inset space ~
42556 \begin_inset space ~
42559 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
42562 \begin_layout Description
42564 \begin_inset space ~
42568 \begin_inset space ~
42571 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
42574 \begin_layout Description
42576 \begin_inset space ~
42579 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
42582 \begin_layout Description
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42587 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
42590 \begin_layout Description
42592 \begin_inset space ~
42596 \begin_inset space ~
42599 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
42602 \begin_layout Description
42604 \begin_inset space ~
42608 \begin_inset space ~
42614 \begin_layout Description
42616 \begin_inset space ~
42620 \begin_inset space ~
42623 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
42626 \begin_layout Description
42628 \begin_inset space ~
42632 \begin_inset space ~
42638 \begin_layout Description
42640 \begin_inset space ~
42644 \begin_inset space ~
42647 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42653 \begin_inset Index idx
42656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42663 , when using this, set the document language to
42668 \begin_layout Description
42670 \begin_inset space ~
42674 \begin_inset space ~
42677 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42682 , when using this, set the document language to
42685 \begin_inset space ~
42691 \begin_layout Description
42693 \begin_inset space ~
42697 \begin_inset space ~
42700 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42706 \begin_inset Index idx
42709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42711 -packages ! japanese
42716 , when using this, set the document language to
42721 \begin_layout Description
42723 \begin_inset space ~
42727 \begin_inset space ~
42730 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42735 , when using this, set the document language to
42740 \begin_layout Description
42742 \begin_inset space ~
42746 \begin_inset space ~
42749 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42754 , when using this, set the document language to
42759 \begin_layout Description
42761 \begin_inset space ~
42764 (EUC-KR) for Korean
42767 \begin_layout Description
42769 \begin_inset space ~
42773 \begin_inset space ~
42777 \begin_inset space ~
42780 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
42783 \begin_layout Description
42785 \begin_inset space ~
42789 \begin_inset space ~
42793 \begin_inset space ~
42796 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
42797 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
42798 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
42801 \begin_layout Description
42803 \begin_inset space ~
42807 \begin_inset space ~
42813 \begin_layout Description
42815 \begin_inset space ~
42819 \begin_inset space ~
42822 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
42823 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
42826 \begin_layout Description
42828 \begin_inset space ~
42832 \begin_inset space ~
42835 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42841 \begin_inset Index idx
42844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42851 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
42854 \begin_layout Description
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42864 \begin_inset space ~
42867 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
42874 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42877 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42884 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42885 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42887 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
42890 \begin_layout Description
42892 \begin_inset space ~
42896 \begin_inset space ~
42899 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42905 \begin_inset Index idx
42908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42915 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
42918 \begin_layout Description
42920 \begin_inset space ~
42923 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42929 \begin_inset Index idx
42932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42934 -packages ! inputenc
42940 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
42944 \begin_layout Description
42946 \begin_inset space ~
42950 \begin_inset space ~
42954 \begin_inset space ~
42957 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
42958 \begin_inset space ~
42964 \begin_layout Description
42966 \begin_inset space ~
42970 \begin_inset space ~
42974 \begin_inset space ~
42977 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
42978 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
42979 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
42983 \begin_layout Description
42985 \begin_inset space ~
42989 \begin_inset space ~
42993 \begin_inset space ~
42996 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
42997 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
43000 \begin_layout Section
43002 \begin_inset Index idx
43005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43012 \begin_inset Index idx
43015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43022 \begin_inset Index idx
43025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43026 Color ! Shaded boxes
43032 \begin_inset Index idx
43035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43036 Color ! Greyed-out notes
43044 \begin_layout Standard
43045 Here you can alter the font color for the
43049 (default: black), for
43052 \begin_inset space ~
43057 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
43061 (default: white) and for
43064 \begin_inset space ~
43074 sets the color back to the default.
43077 \begin_layout Standard
43078 Clicking any button showing
43086 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
43087 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
43088 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
43089 later more quickly.
43092 \begin_layout Standard
43093 Note, if you change the
43096 \begin_inset space ~
43101 font color and use the option
43104 \begin_inset space ~
43109 in the document settings under
43112 \begin_inset space ~
43117 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
43118 \begin_inset space ~
43122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43124 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
43131 \begin_layout Standard
43132 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
43138 \begin_layout Standard
43142 \begin_inset space ~
43151 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
43154 \begin_inset space ~
43157 Code after a forced page break:
43160 \begin_layout Itemize
43161 For the page color:
43162 \begin_inset Newline newline
43169 pagecolor{color name}
43172 \begin_layout Itemize
43173 For the text color:
43174 \begin_inset Newline newline
43184 \begin_layout Standard
43185 You are restricted to one of
43221 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
43228 \begin_inset space ~
43234 \begin_inset Newline newline
43237 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
43238 names to refer to them:
43241 \begin_layout Itemize
43247 \begin_inset Newline newline
43252 page_backgroundcolor
43255 \begin_layout Itemize
43259 \begin_inset space ~
43265 \begin_inset Newline newline
43273 \begin_layout Itemize
43277 \begin_inset space ~
43283 \begin_inset Newline newline
43291 \begin_layout Itemize
43295 \begin_inset space ~
43301 \begin_inset Newline newline
43309 \begin_layout Standard
43310 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
43313 \begin_inset space ~
43321 \begin_inset space ~
43329 \begin_layout Section
43333 \begin_layout Standard
43334 Here you can adjust the
43338 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
43342 as described in section
43343 \begin_inset space ~
43347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43349 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
43356 \begin_layout Section
43360 \begin_layout Standard
43361 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43367 \begin_inset Index idx
43370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43382 \begin_inset Index idx
43385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43387 -packages ! jurabib
43395 Sectioned bibliography
43397 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43403 \begin_inset Index idx
43406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43408 -packages ! bibtopic
43413 and you can select a
43417 for the generation of the bibliography.
43418 For a further description see section
43419 \begin_inset space ~
43423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43425 reference "sec:Bibliography"
43432 \begin_layout Section
43436 \begin_layout Standard
43437 Here you can define the
43441 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
43443 \begin_inset space ~
43447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43449 reference "sec:Index"
43456 \begin_layout Section
43460 \begin_layout Standard
43461 The PDF properties are explained in section
43462 \begin_inset space ~
43466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43468 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
43475 \begin_layout Section
43479 \begin_layout Standard
43480 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
43481 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43487 \begin_inset Index idx
43490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43492 -packages ! amsmath
43502 \begin_inset Index idx
43505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43507 -packages ! amssymb
43517 \begin_inset Index idx
43520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43532 \begin_inset Index idx
43535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43547 \begin_inset Index idx
43550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43552 -packages ! mathdots
43562 \begin_inset Index idx
43565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43567 -packages ! mathtools
43577 \begin_inset Index idx
43580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43592 \begin_inset Index idx
43595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43597 -packages ! stackrel
43607 \begin_inset Index idx
43610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43612 -packages ! stmaryrd
43622 \begin_inset Index idx
43625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43627 -packages ! undertilde
43632 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
43635 \begin_layout Description
43636 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
43637 -errors in formulas,
43638 ensure that you have this enabled.
43641 \begin_layout Description
43642 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
43643 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
43644 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
43648 \begin_layout Description
43649 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
43652 \begin_inset space ~
43664 \begin_layout Description
43665 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
43668 \begin_inset space ~
43680 \begin_layout Description
43681 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
43692 \begin_layout Description
43693 mathtools is used for the math commands
43729 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
43736 \begin_layout Description
43737 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
43739 Chemical Symbols and Equations
43748 \begin_layout Description
43749 stackrel is used for the math command
43766 \begin_layout Description
43767 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
43770 \begin_layout Description
43771 undertilde is used for the math command
43779 Accents for one Character
43788 \begin_layout Section
43792 \begin_layout Standard
43793 The float placement options are described in the section
43796 \begin_inset space ~
43804 \begin_inset space ~
43812 \begin_layout Section
43816 \begin_layout Standard
43817 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
43819 Program Code Listings
43824 \begin_inset space ~
43832 \begin_layout Section
43836 \begin_layout Standard
43837 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
43845 set to be used and set the
43850 The itemize environment is described in section
43851 \begin_inset space ~
43855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43857 reference "sec:Itemize"
43864 \begin_layout Standard
43865 You can furthermore specify a
43868 \begin_inset space ~
43873 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43874 command of the desired character.
43875 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
43882 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
43884 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43888 \begin_inset space \space{}
43892 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
43902 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
43903 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
43906 \begin_layout Standard
43907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43915 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43916 -packages in the preamble (menu
43919 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43920 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43923 \begin_inset space ~
43929 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
43933 usepackage{textcomp}
43936 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
43940 usepackage{amssymb}
43950 \begin_layout Section
43954 \begin_layout Standard
43955 Branches are described in section
43956 \begin_inset space ~
43960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43962 reference "sec:Branches"
43969 \begin_layout Section
43971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43973 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
43980 \begin_layout Standard
43981 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
43984 \begin_layout Description
43986 \begin_inset space ~
43990 \begin_inset space ~
43993 Format: The format that is used when you enter
43994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44013 View Master Document
44014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44021 Update Master Document
44022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44029 menu or the toolbar.
44030 The default is set in
44032 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44033 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44038 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44042 \begin_inset space ~
44046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44048 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44055 \begin_layout Description
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44064 Output settings for the menu
44066 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44068 \begin_inset space ~
44074 For a detailed description see section
44076 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44081 \begin_inset space ~
44089 \begin_layout Description
44091 \begin_inset space ~
44095 \begin_inset space ~
44098 Options offers settings for the export format
44106 \begin_inset space ~
44111 will assure that the output follows exactly version
44112 \begin_inset space ~
44115 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
44119 \begin_inset space ~
44124 settings are described in detail in section
44126 Math Output in XHTML
44131 \begin_inset space ~
44140 \begin_inset space ~
44144 \begin_inset space ~
44149 is used for the size of equations in the output.
44152 \begin_layout Description
44154 \begin_inset space ~
44159 Save transient properties
44161 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
44162 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
44163 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
44167 \begin_layout Itemize
44168 the activation of change tracking
44171 \begin_layout Itemize
44172 the output of tracked changes
44175 \begin_layout Itemize
44176 the recording of the document directory path.
44179 \begin_layout Standard
44180 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
44181 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
44185 \begin_layout Section
44193 \begin_layout Standard
44194 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44196 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
44198 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44200 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
44204 \begin_layout Standard
44205 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44206 -syntax is given in section
44207 \begin_inset space ~
44211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44213 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
44220 \begin_layout Chapter
44226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44228 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
44233 \begin_inset Index idx
44236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44245 \begin_layout Standard
44246 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
44248 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44252 It has the following submenus.
44255 \begin_layout Section
44259 \begin_layout Subsection
44263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44264 User Interface File
44265 \begin_inset Index idx
44268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44269 Customization ! of toolbars
44275 \begin_inset Index idx
44278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44279 Customization ! of menus
44287 \begin_layout Standard
44288 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
44289 interface (ui) file.
44290 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
44298 \begin_layout Description
44303 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
44306 \begin_layout Description
44313 the menu entries in popup context menus
44316 \begin_layout Description
44321 specifies the toolbar buttons
44324 \begin_layout Standard
44325 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
44326 and edit the entries.
44329 \begin_layout Standard
44330 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
44342 entries must be finished with an explicit
44367 and in the case of the
44368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44380 The syntax for the entries is:
44383 \begin_layout Standard
44384 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44413 \begin_layout Standard
44415 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44418 All the \SpecialChar LyX
44419 -functions are listed in the menu
44421 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
44423 \begin_inset space ~
44431 \begin_layout Standard
44432 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44438 \begin_layout Standard
44439 For example, assuming you use the menu
44441 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44444 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
44448 \begin_layout Standard
44449 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44473 \begin_layout Standard
44475 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44490 to have the sixth bookmark.
44493 \begin_layout Standard
44497 \begin_inset space ~
44502 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
44503 's toolbar buttons.
44504 The currently available icon sets are compared in
44505 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44508 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
44515 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44519 \begin_layout Standard
44522 Enable tool tips in main work area
44524 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
44528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44532 \begin_layout Standard
44537 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
44538 should display in the menu
44540 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44542 \begin_inset space ~
44550 \begin_layout Subsection
44554 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44558 \begin_layout Standard
44561 Restore window layouts and geometries
44564 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
44565 the last \SpecialChar LyX
44569 \begin_layout Standard
44572 Restore cursor positions
44574 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
44578 \begin_layout Standard
44581 Load opened files from last session
44583 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
44587 \begin_layout Standard
44590 Clear all session information
44592 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
44593 sessions (cursor positions, names
44594 of last opened documents, etc.).
44597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44601 name "subsec:Backup documents"
44606 \begin_inset Index idx
44609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44618 \begin_layout Standard
44621 Backup original documents when saving
44623 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
44624 it was saved the last time.
44625 It is stored in the
44628 \begin_inset space ~
44634 \begin_inset space ~
44638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44640 reference "sec:Paths"
44644 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
44647 \begin_inset space ~
44653 The backup file has the file extension
44654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44668 \begin_layout Standard
44671 Backup documents, every
44673 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
44676 \begin_layout Standard
44679 Save documents compressed by default
44681 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
44682 \begin_inset space ~
44686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44688 reference "subsec:Compressed"
44693 This applies to newly created documents only.
44694 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
44697 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44698 Windows & work area
44701 \begin_layout Standard
44704 Open documents in tabs
44706 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
44710 \begin_layout Standard
44715 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
44720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44722 \begin_inset space ~
44726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44728 reference "sec:Paths"
44732 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
44739 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
44740 documents will be opened in the same running instance
44741 of \SpecialChar LyX
44743 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
44744 instance is created for each file.
44747 \begin_layout Standard
44750 Single close-tab button
44752 is checked, there will only be one close button (
44762 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
44763 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
44765 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
44766 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
44772 \begin_layout Standard
44773 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44781 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
44782 before the change takes effect.
44790 \begin_layout Standard
44795 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
44797 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
44799 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44803 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
44804 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
44805 and only want to close the view in once instance.
44808 \begin_layout Subsection
44810 \begin_inset Index idx
44813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44822 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
44829 \begin_layout Standard
44830 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
44834 \begin_layout Standard
44835 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44843 This section only deals with the fonts
44847 the \SpecialChar LyX
44849 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
44852 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44853 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44864 \begin_layout Standard
44865 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
44882 (depends on the system) as its
44885 \begin_inset space ~
44901 \begin_layout Standard
44902 You can change the font size with the
44909 \begin_layout Standard
44914 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
44916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44919 points have the size of 1
44920 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44924 \begin_inset space ~
44928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44930 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
44935 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
44936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44940 The sizes are explained in detail in section
44941 \begin_inset space ~
44945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44947 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
44954 \begin_layout Standard
44957 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
44959 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
44960 needs to redraw the screen less often.
44961 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
44962 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
44963 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
44965 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
44966 \begin_inset space ~
44972 \begin_layout Subsection
44974 \begin_inset Index idx
44977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44978 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
44985 \begin_inset Index idx
44988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44997 \begin_layout Standard
44998 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
44999 by choosing an item in the
45000 list and selecting the
45007 \begin_layout Standard
45008 By checking the option
45012 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
45015 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
45016 \begin_inset space ~
45020 \begin_inset space ~
45025 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
45028 \begin_layout Subsection
45030 \begin_inset Index idx
45033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45042 \begin_layout Standard
45043 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
45047 \begin_layout Standard
45052 enables previewing snippets of your document.
45053 This feature is described in section
45054 \begin_inset space ~
45058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45060 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
45067 \begin_layout Standard
45068 Checking the option
45071 \begin_inset space ~
45075 \begin_inset space ~
45079 \begin_inset space ~
45084 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
45087 \begin_layout Section
45089 \begin_inset Index idx
45092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45101 \begin_layout Subsection
45105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45109 \begin_layout Standard
45112 Cursor follows scrollbar
45114 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
45118 \begin_layout Standard
45119 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
45120 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
45121 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
45124 \begin_layout Standard
45127 Scroll below end of document
45129 is self-explanatory.
45132 \begin_layout Standard
45133 In \SpecialChar LyX
45134 one can jump from word to word by pressing
45141 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
45143 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
45144 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
45147 \begin_layout Standard
45150 Sort environments alphabetically
45152 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
45155 \begin_layout Standard
45158 Group environments by their category
45160 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
45163 \begin_layout Standard
45168 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
45179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45183 \begin_layout Standard
45184 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
45189 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
45190 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
45194 \begin_layout Subsection
45196 \begin_inset Index idx
45199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45206 \begin_inset Index idx
45209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45210 Settings ! Shortcuts
45218 \begin_layout Standard
45223 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
45225 Several binding files are available, among them:
45228 \begin_layout Description
45229 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
45232 \begin_layout Description
45233 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
45245 \begin_layout Description
45246 mac.bind a set of bindings for
45249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45257 \begin_layout Standard
45258 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
45263 , and binding files for special languages.
45264 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
45265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45269 \begin_inset space \space{}
45273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45281 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
45282 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
45283 will try to use the appropriate binding
45287 \begin_layout Standard
45288 Some binding files, like
45292 , only have a limited scope.
45293 When looking at the end of the file
45297 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
45300 \begin_layout Standard
45304 \begin_inset space ~
45308 \begin_inset space ~
45313 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
45314 in the selected key binding file.
45317 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45321 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
45326 \begin_inset Index idx
45329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45330 Key Bindings ! Editing
45338 \begin_layout Standard
45339 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
45340 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
45341 functions and the bound shortcuts.
45342 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
45345 Show key-bindings containing
45348 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
45349 Insert there for example as keyword
45350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45357 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
45358 functions that contain
45359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45367 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
45368 All \SpecialChar LyX
45369 functions are also listed in the file
45374 that you will find in the
45381 \begin_layout Standard
45382 For example, to add the shortcut
45390 , select the function and press the
45395 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
45396 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
45399 \begin_layout Standard
45400 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
45401 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
45403 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
45404 function names as a semicolon separated list.
45406 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
45411 \begin_layout Standard
45412 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
45415 \begin_layout Standard
45416 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
45418 The syntax of the entries is:
45421 \begin_layout Standard
45427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45446 \begin_layout Subsection
45448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45450 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
45455 \begin_inset Index idx
45458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45465 \begin_inset Index idx
45468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45469 Settings ! Keyboard Map
45477 \begin_layout Standard
45478 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
45479 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
45480 provides keyboard maps.
45481 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
45482 is a Romanian one, you can enable
45485 \begin_inset space ~
45489 \begin_inset space ~
45494 and select the keyboard map file named
45501 \begin_layout Standard
45510 keyboard map and, if you use the
45514 bindings, you can select the first and second with
45517 arg "keymap-primary"
45523 arg "keymap-secondary"
45526 respectively or toggle between them with
45529 arg "keymap-toggle"
45535 \begin_layout Standard
45536 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45544 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
45553 \begin_layout Standard
45554 You can also specify the mouse
45556 Wheel scrolling speed
45559 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
45563 Middle mouse button pasting
45565 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
45566 inserts the content of the clipboard.
45569 \begin_layout Standard
45577 \begin_inset space ~
45581 \begin_inset space ~
45586 you can select a key for zooming.
45587 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
45590 \begin_layout Subsection
45594 \begin_layout Standard
45595 Input completion is described in section
45596 \begin_inset space ~
45600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45602 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
45609 \begin_layout Section
45611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45618 \begin_inset Index idx
45621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45628 \begin_inset Index idx
45631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45640 \begin_layout Standard
45641 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
45642 are normally determined during
45644 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
45647 \begin_layout Description
45649 \begin_inset space ~
45652 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
45653 's working directory.
45654 It is the default when you
45665 \begin_inset space ~
45673 \begin_layout Description
45675 \begin_inset space ~
45678 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
45680 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45682 \begin_inset space ~
45686 \begin_inset space ~
45694 \begin_layout Description
45696 \begin_inset space ~
45699 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
45705 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45709 \begin_inset Newline newline
45713 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45725 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
45726 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
45734 \begin_layout Description
45736 \begin_inset space ~
45740 \begin_inset Index idx
45743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45749 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
45750 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
45751 \begin_inset space ~
45755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45757 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45765 will be used to save the backups.
45766 \begin_inset Newline newline
45769 Backup files have the ending
45770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45780 \begin_layout Description
45782 \begin_inset space ~
45785 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
45786 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
45788 \begin_inset Newline newline
45795 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45801 You can edit this file with the program
45810 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
45811 in its preferences under
45814 \begin_inset space ~
45820 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
45825 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
45827 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
45828 in your \SpecialChar LyX
45834 and \SpecialChar LyX
45835 need to be running the same time.
45836 \begin_inset Newline newline
45839 The pipe is also used for the
45843 feature, see section
45844 \begin_inset space ~
45848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45850 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45855 \begin_inset Newline newline
45858 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
45859 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
45860 \begin_inset Newline newline
45876 \begin_layout Description
45878 \begin_inset space ~
45881 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
45884 \begin_layout Description
45886 \begin_inset space ~
45889 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
45890 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
45891 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
45894 \begin_layout Description
45896 \begin_inset space ~
45899 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
45905 You only need to specify it if you are using
45909 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
45911 For \SpecialChar LyX
45916 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
45920 \begin_layout Description
45922 \begin_inset space ~
45925 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
45926 When \SpecialChar LyX
45927 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
45928 to find it on the system.
45929 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
45931 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
45933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45940 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
45941 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
45944 \begin_layout Description
45946 \begin_inset space ~
45949 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
45950 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
45951 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
45952 code or in the document
45954 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
45956 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
45957 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
45958 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
45959 scanned for the input files.
45960 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
45961 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
45963 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
45964 compilation may fail for some documents.
45967 \begin_layout Section
45971 \begin_layout Standard
45972 Here you can insert your
45981 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
45983 \begin_inset space ~
45987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45989 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45993 , to mark changes you make as yours.
45996 \begin_layout Section
45998 \begin_inset Index idx
46001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46002 Language ! Settings
46008 \begin_inset Index idx
46011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 Settings ! Language
46020 \begin_layout Subsection
46022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46024 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46031 \begin_layout Description
46033 \begin_inset space ~
46037 \begin_inset space ~
46040 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
46042 You can find its actual translation status here:
46043 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46045 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
46052 \begin_layout Description
46054 \begin_inset space ~
46057 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
46058 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
46059 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
46060 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
46061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46077 The most widespread language package is
46082 \begin_inset Index idx
46085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46092 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
46094 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46095 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46096 come with the alternative
46102 \begin_inset Index idx
46105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46107 -packages ! polyglossia
46112 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
46113 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
46119 The available selections are described in section
46120 \begin_inset space ~
46124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46126 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
46133 \begin_layout Description
46135 \begin_inset space ~
46138 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46139 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
46140 you can here specify the command to start the package.
46141 An example is the start command
46147 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
46149 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
46153 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46168 selectlanguage{$$lang}
46173 \begin_layout Description
46175 \begin_inset space ~
46183 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
46184 command toggles the package on and off.
46187 \begin_layout Description
46189 \begin_inset space ~
46193 \begin_inset space ~
46196 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
46200 \begin_layout Description
46202 \begin_inset space ~
46206 \begin_inset space ~
46209 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
46213 \begin_layout Description
46215 \begin_inset space ~
46219 \begin_inset space ~
46222 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
46223 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
46224 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
46226 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
46233 \begin_layout Description
46235 \begin_inset space ~
46238 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
46240 When this option is not set, the
46243 \begin_inset space ~
46248 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46250 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
46253 \begin_inset space ~
46261 \begin_layout Description
46263 \begin_inset space ~
46269 \begin_inset space ~
46275 When it is not set, the
46278 \begin_inset space ~
46283 is set to the end of the document.
46286 \begin_layout Description
46288 \begin_inset space ~
46292 \begin_inset space ~
46295 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
46296 language will be underlined in blue.
46299 \begin_layout Description
46301 \begin_inset space ~
46305 \begin_inset space ~
46308 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
46309 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
46312 \begin_layout Description
46314 \begin_inset space ~
46317 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
46318 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
46319 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
46320 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
46323 \begin_layout Subsection
46327 \begin_layout Standard
46328 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
46329 \begin_inset space ~
46333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46335 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
46342 \begin_layout Section
46346 \begin_layout Subsection
46348 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46350 name "subsec:General-output"
46357 \begin_layout Description
46359 \begin_inset space ~
46362 search Commands that will be used for the menu
46364 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46366 \begin_inset space ~
46372 For a detailed description see section
46374 Reverse DVI/PDF search
46379 \begin_inset space ~
46387 \begin_layout Description
46389 \begin_inset space ~
46392 Options Options for the program
46396 that is used for the export format
46401 \begin_inset space ~
46405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46407 reference "subsec:Export"
46412 Possible options are listed in the
46417 \begin_inset Newline newline
46421 \begin_inset Flex URL
46424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46426 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
46436 \begin_layout Description
46438 \begin_inset space ~
46442 \begin_inset space ~
46445 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
46448 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46449 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
46451 \begin_inset space ~
46457 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
46460 \begin_layout Description
46462 \begin_inset space ~
46466 \begin_inset Index idx
46469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46476 \begin_inset Index idx
46479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46480 Settings ! Date format
46485 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
46486 \begin_inset Newline newline
46490 \begin_inset Flex URL
46493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46495 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
46501 \begin_inset Newline newline
46504 For example the format
46505 \begin_inset Newline newline
46509 \begin_inset Newline newline
46512 prints the date as day/month/year.
46515 \begin_layout Description
46517 \begin_inset space ~
46521 \begin_inset space ~
46524 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
46525 is allowed to overwrite on export.
46528 \begin_layout Subsection
46534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46536 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
46541 \begin_inset Index idx
46544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46545 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
46554 \begin_layout Description
46556 \begin_inset space ~
46564 \begin_inset space ~
46568 \begin_inset space ~
46571 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
46576 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
46597 are used for Cyrillic.
46598 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
46599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46611 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
46613 sets up in the background.
46614 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
46617 \begin_layout Description
46619 \begin_inset space ~
46623 \begin_inset space ~
46627 \begin_inset space ~
46631 \begin_inset space ~
46634 options They only have an effect when the program
46638 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
46641 \begin_layout Standard
46642 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
46643 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
46644 manuals of the applications.
46647 \begin_layout Description
46649 \begin_inset space ~
46652 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
46653 \begin_inset space ~
46657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46659 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
46666 \begin_layout Description
46668 \begin_inset space ~
46671 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
46672 \begin_inset space ~
46676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46678 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
46685 \begin_layout Description
46687 \begin_inset space ~
46690 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
46691 \begin_inset space ~
46695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46697 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
46704 \begin_layout Description
46710 \begin_inset space ~
46713 command Command for the program
46715 Check\SpecialChar TeX
46718 that is described in the section
46720 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
46725 Additional Features
46730 \begin_layout Standard
46731 There are additionally the following options:
46734 \begin_layout Description
46736 \begin_inset space ~
46740 \begin_inset space ~
46744 \begin_inset space ~
46748 \begin_inset space ~
46753 \begin_inset space ~
46756 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
46757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46774 to separate folders.
46775 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
46777 \begin_inset Index idx
46780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46787 \begin_inset Index idx
46790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46799 \begin_layout Description
46801 \begin_inset space ~
46805 \begin_inset space ~
46809 \begin_inset space ~
46813 \begin_inset space ~
46817 \begin_inset space ~
46821 \begin_inset space ~
46824 changes Removes all manually set
46830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46831 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46833 \begin_inset space ~
46838 dialog when changing the document class.
46841 \begin_layout Section
46843 \begin_inset space ~
46847 \begin_inset Index idx
46850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46859 \begin_layout Subsection
46861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46863 name "subsec:Converters"
46868 \begin_inset Index idx
46871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46880 \begin_layout Standard
46881 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
46882 from one format to another.
46883 You can modify converters or create new ones.
46884 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
46891 \begin_inset space ~
46896 field and press the
46901 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
46905 \begin_inset space ~
46910 drop-down list, modify the
46914 field and press the
46921 \begin_layout Standard
46924 Converter File Cache
46930 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
46932 Maximum Age (in days
46935 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
46936 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
46939 \begin_layout Standard
46940 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
46941 definition, is described in the section
46952 \begin_layout Subsection
46954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46956 name "sec:File-Formats"
46961 \begin_inset Index idx
46964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46971 \begin_inset Index idx
46974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46983 \begin_layout Standard
46984 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
46994 programs that should be used for certain formats.
46997 \begin_layout Standard
46998 You can also define the
47000 Default output format
47002 that is used when you use
47004 View, Update, View Master Document
47008 Update Master Document
47014 menu or the toolbar.
47017 \begin_layout Standard
47018 More about formats and their options is described in the section
47029 \begin_layout Standard
47030 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
47032 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
47033 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
47034 This is done by specifying a
47039 More about this is described in the section
47050 \begin_layout Chapter
47051 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
47053 \begin_inset Index idx
47056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47065 name "chap:Units-available-in"
47072 \begin_layout Standard
47074 \begin_inset space ~
47078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47080 reference "tab:Units"
47084 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
47085 and used in this documentation.
47088 \begin_layout Standard
47089 \begin_inset Float table
47095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47096 \begin_inset Caption Standard
47098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47114 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47122 \begin_inset Tabular
47123 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
47124 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
47125 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47126 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47127 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47333 scaled point (65536
47334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47412 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
47416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47485 % of original image width
47490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47801 \begin_layout Chapter
47803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47805 name "chap:Credits"
47812 \begin_layout Standard
47813 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
47814 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
47817 \begin_layout Itemize
47820 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
47823 \begin_layout Itemize
47829 \begin_layout Itemize
47835 \begin_layout Itemize
47841 \begin_layout Itemize
47847 \begin_layout Itemize
47853 \begin_layout Itemize
47859 \begin_layout Itemize
47865 \begin_layout Itemize
47868 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
47871 \begin_layout Itemize
47877 \begin_layout Itemize
47883 \begin_layout Itemize
47889 \begin_layout Itemize
47895 \begin_layout Itemize
47901 \begin_layout Itemize
47907 \begin_layout Itemize
47913 \begin_layout Itemize
47919 \begin_layout Itemize
47920 The \SpecialChar LyX
47922 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47931 \begin_layout Standard
47932 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47935 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
47942 \begin_layout Bibliography
47943 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47944 LatexCommand bibitem
47950 The \SpecialChar LyX
47952 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47955 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
47960 \begin_inset Newline newline
47964 \begin_inset Flex URL
47967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47969 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
47977 \begin_layout Bibliography
47978 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47979 LatexCommand bibitem
47980 key "latexcompanion"
47984 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
47986 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47987 Companion Second Edition.
47990 Addison-Wesley, 2004
47993 \begin_layout Bibliography
47994 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47995 LatexCommand bibitem
48000 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
48003 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
48007 Addison-Wesley, 2003
48010 \begin_layout Bibliography
48011 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48012 LatexCommand bibitem
48020 : A Document Preparation System.
48023 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
48026 \begin_layout Bibliography
48027 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48028 LatexCommand bibitem
48037 The \SpecialChar TeX
48041 Addison-Wesley, 1984
48044 \begin_layout Bibliography
48045 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48046 LatexCommand bibitem
48051 The \SpecialChar TeX
48053 \begin_inset Newline newline
48057 \begin_inset Flex URL
48060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48062 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
48070 \begin_layout Bibliography
48071 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48072 LatexCommand bibitem
48077 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
48079 \begin_inset Newline newline
48083 \begin_inset Flex URL
48086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48088 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
48096 \begin_layout Bibliography
48097 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48098 LatexCommand bibitem
48104 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48106 name "Documentation"
48107 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
48113 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48117 \begin_inset Newline newline
48121 \begin_inset Flex URL
48124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48126 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
48134 \begin_layout Bibliography
48135 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48136 LatexCommand bibitem
48142 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48144 name "Documentation"
48145 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
48149 how to use the program
48151 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48155 \begin_inset Newline newline
48159 \begin_inset Flex URL
48162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48164 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
48172 \begin_layout Bibliography
48173 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48174 LatexCommand bibitem
48180 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48182 name "Documentation"
48183 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
48192 \begin_inset Newline newline
48196 \begin_inset Flex URL
48199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48201 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
48209 \begin_layout Bibliography
48210 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48211 LatexCommand bibitem
48212 key "makeindex-man"
48217 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48220 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
48229 \begin_inset Newline newline
48233 \begin_inset Flex URL
48236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48238 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
48246 \begin_layout Bibliography
48247 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48248 LatexCommand bibitem
48254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48256 name "Documentation"
48257 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
48266 \begin_inset Newline newline
48270 \begin_inset Flex URL
48273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48275 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
48283 \begin_layout Bibliography
48284 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48285 LatexCommand bibitem
48291 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48293 name "Documentation"
48294 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
48298 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
48300 \begin_inset Newline newline
48304 \begin_inset Flex URL
48307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48309 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
48317 \begin_layout Bibliography
48318 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48319 LatexCommand bibitem
48325 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48327 name "Documentation"
48328 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
48332 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48338 \begin_inset Index idx
48341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48343 -packages ! caption
48349 \begin_inset Newline newline
48353 \begin_inset Flex URL
48356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48358 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
48366 \begin_layout Bibliography
48367 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48368 LatexCommand bibitem
48374 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48376 name "Documentation"
48377 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
48381 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48387 \begin_inset Index idx
48390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48392 -packages ! enumitem
48398 \begin_inset Newline newline
48402 \begin_inset Flex URL
48405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48407 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
48415 \begin_layout Bibliography
48416 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48417 LatexCommand bibitem
48423 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48425 name "Documentation"
48426 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
48430 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48436 \begin_inset Index idx
48439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48441 -packages ! fancyhdr
48447 \begin_inset Newline newline
48451 \begin_inset Flex URL
48454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48456 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
48464 \begin_layout Bibliography
48465 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48466 LatexCommand bibitem
48472 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48474 name "Documentation"
48475 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
48479 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48485 \begin_inset Index idx
48488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48490 -packages ! hyperref
48496 \begin_inset Newline newline
48500 \begin_inset Flex URL
48503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48505 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
48513 \begin_layout Bibliography
48514 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48515 LatexCommand bibitem
48521 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48523 name "Documentation"
48524 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
48528 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48534 \begin_inset Index idx
48537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48539 -packages ! nomencl
48545 \begin_inset Newline newline
48549 \begin_inset Flex URL
48552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48554 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
48562 \begin_layout Bibliography
48563 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48564 LatexCommand bibitem
48570 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48572 name "Documentation"
48573 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
48577 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48583 \begin_inset Index idx
48586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48588 -packages ! prettyref
48594 \begin_inset Newline newline
48598 \begin_inset Flex URL
48601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48603 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
48611 \begin_layout Bibliography
48612 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48613 LatexCommand bibitem
48619 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48621 name "Documentation"
48622 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
48626 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48632 \begin_inset Index idx
48635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48637 -packages ! refstyle
48643 \begin_inset Newline newline
48647 \begin_inset Flex URL
48650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48652 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
48660 \begin_layout Bibliography
48661 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48662 LatexCommand bibitem
48668 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48671 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
48675 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48677 \begin_inset Newline newline
48681 \begin_inset Flex URL
48684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48686 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
48694 \begin_layout Bibliography
48695 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48696 LatexCommand bibitem
48702 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48705 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
48709 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48711 \begin_inset Newline newline
48715 \begin_inset Flex URL
48718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48720 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
48728 \begin_layout Bibliography
48729 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48730 LatexCommand bibitem
48736 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48739 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
48743 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48744 for Cyrillic languages:
48745 \begin_inset Newline newline
48749 \begin_inset Flex URL
48752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48754 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
48762 \begin_layout Bibliography
48763 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48764 LatexCommand bibitem
48770 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48773 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
48777 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48779 \begin_inset Newline newline
48783 \begin_inset Flex URL
48786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48788 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
48796 \begin_layout Bibliography
48797 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48798 LatexCommand bibitem
48804 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48807 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
48811 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48813 \begin_inset Newline newline
48817 \begin_inset Flex URL
48820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48822 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
48830 \begin_layout Bibliography
48831 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48832 LatexCommand bibitem
48838 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48841 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
48845 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48847 \begin_inset Newline newline
48851 \begin_inset Flex URL
48854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48856 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
48864 \begin_layout Bibliography
48865 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48866 LatexCommand bibitem
48872 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48875 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
48879 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48881 \begin_inset Newline newline
48885 \begin_inset Flex URL
48888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48890 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
48898 \begin_layout Bibliography
48899 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48900 LatexCommand bibitem
48906 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48909 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
48913 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48915 \begin_inset Newline newline
48919 \begin_inset Flex URL
48922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48924 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
48932 \begin_layout Bibliography
48933 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48934 LatexCommand bibitem
48940 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48943 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
48947 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48949 \begin_inset Newline newline
48953 \begin_inset Flex URL
48956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48958 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
48966 \begin_layout Bibliography
48967 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48968 LatexCommand bibitem
48974 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48977 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
48981 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48983 \begin_inset Newline newline
48987 \begin_inset Flex URL
48990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48992 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
49000 \begin_layout Bibliography
49001 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49002 LatexCommand bibitem
49008 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49011 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
49015 about new features in
49021 \begin_inset Newline newline
49025 \begin_inset Flex URL
49028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49030 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
49038 \begin_layout Standard
49039 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49073 \begin_inset Note Note
49076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49083 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
49084 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
49085 bibliography is the second one:
49093 \begin_layout Standard
49094 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
49095 LatexCommand bibtex
49096 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
49097 options "biblio/alphadin"
49104 \begin_layout Standard
49105 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49109 \begin_layout Standard
49110 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
49111 LatexCommand printnomenclature
49117 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
49118 LatexCommand printindex